Home

2014 Jeep Grand Cherokee Owner`s Manual

1. 5 7L Engine If Equipped 442 Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Reformulated Gasoline 443 M E i Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 443 ud E Em E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles T MEL M M ECL MMT InGasoline 2 444 Replacement Parts casteu iernat s anini 449 Materials Added To Fuel 200 0000 aip e MM ipe Fuel System Cautions o an aaa aana 445 a a a a ae Carbon Monoxide Warnings 446 Pincgency Pel Pler Toor Release E FLEXIBLE FUEL 3 6L ENGINE ONLY B VEHICLE LOADING ix dicente n ce IF EQUIPPED 53 527234 s xdi x3 Rea 446 Certification Label ens 453 E 85 General Information 4222s 446 W TRAILER TOWING 5452422 455 Ethanol Fuel E 85 ema 447 Common Towing Definitions 455 Fuel Requirements y resso asera 447 Trailer Hitch Classification 460 350 STARTING AND OPERATING E Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings 461 Trailer And Tongue Weight 462 Towing Requirements lisse 463 TowingTips lleeee 468 ll SNOW PLOW 0000000 470 ll RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC 471 Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle 471 Recreational Towing Two Wheel Drive Models seas
2. Before You Begin Programming HomeLink 245 Programming A Rolling Code 246 Programming A Non Rolling Code 248 Canadian Gate Operator Programming 249 Using HomeLink 000 0 251 SeCurlty ses eee cei c e kx ea RR y 251 Troubleshooting Tipse sat esu casati mes aces 251 General Information aoaaa aaas 252 POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED 253 Opening Sunroof Express 254 Opening Sunroof Manual Mode 254 Closing Sunroof Express 254 Closing Sunroof Manual Mode 254 Pinch Protect Feature n n llle 254 Venting Sunroof Express 255 Sunshade Operation 255 Wind Buffeting 6 6 0 0 0 0 0c cea 255 Sunroof Maintenance 06 255 Ignition OFF Operation 256 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 E COMMANDVIEWG SUNROOF WITH Ignition OFF Operation sess 260 Bere at ub SEA AACE EE as 298 Sunroof Fully Closed 0 0 260 een Ae eta aoe tas 297m ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS 260 Opening Sunroof Manual Mode 257 E POWER INVERTER IF EQUIPPED Closing Sunroof Express 257 B CUPHOLDERS sss NE MN
3. isle 530 Inc T 533 Anti Lock Brake System ABS lt ecco a ermas es 398 Anti Lock Warning Light llle 285 Antu Theft System esaad vL E d Ede 293 Appearance Care sss ies y ee PE px ues 541 Assist Hill Statt zi ore BIRR ae ES 404 Auto Down Power Windows lesen 42 Automatic Headlights llis 165 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 339 Automatic Transmission llle 360 Adding Fluid i see Ree 540 Fluid and Filter Changes 0 540 Fluid Chane 25s d heme d ope demas 540 Blind Level Check RR 538 Fid Types ze dme a Bechet 538 Gear Ranges ad ie edere ER e dp I RUE Ret a 361 ee INDEX 587 Special Additiv s 5 eke ee rs 539 Auxiliary Electrical Outlet Power Outlet 260 Auxiliary Power Outlet llle 260 Battery s de x aep a e eae ya eases 519 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 26 Belts Seat oed dior Shue kd d cte doen Pur 52 Blind Spot Monitoring llle 129 Body Mechanism Lubrication sss 523 B Pillar Location 2 2 0 0 000 eee enn 417 Brake Assist System llle 399 Brake Control System Electronic 397 Brake Fluid saosa ser Sw bare ae eR 535 Brake System 6 0 eee eee 535 Anti Lock ABS si 2 46462044448 eabe0a48 398 Fluid Check RR RU RERO 535 Master Cylinder pes ose act ROG ect n 535 Parking 32 suere de es heehee etate a 395 Warning Light i2
4. Cavity Car Micro Description Cavity Car Micro Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse F29 20 Amp Trailer Tow F37 30 Amp Rear Blower Yellow Parking Lights Pink If Equipped If Equipped F38 30 Amp Power Inverter F30 30 Amp Trailer Tow Recep Pink 115V AC Pink tacle If Equipped If Equipped F32 30 Amp Drive Train Control F39 30 Amp Power Liftgate Pink Module Pink If Equipped F34 30 Amp Slip Differential F40 10 Amp Daytime Running Pink Control Red Lights F35 30 Amp Sunroof F42 20 Amp Horn Pink If Equipped Yellow F36 30 Amp Rear Defroster F44 10 Amp Diagnostic Port Pink Red 550 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Car Micro Description Cavity Car Micro Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse F46 10 Amp Tire Pressure F53 20Amp Trailer Tow Left Red Monitor Yellow Turn Stop Lights F49 10 Amp Integrated Central If Equipped Red Stack Climate F56 15 Amp Additional Content Control Blue Diesel engine only F50 20 Amp Air Suspension F57 15 Amp Transmission Yellow Control Module Blue If Equipped F59 10 Amp Purging Pump F51 10 Amp Ignition Node Red Diesel engine only Red Module Keyless F60 15 Amp Transmission Ignition Steering Blue Control Module Soles F62 10 Amp Air Conditioning F52 5 Amp Battery Sensor Red Clutch Tan MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 551 Cavity Ca
5. 030909670 Rear Seat Release WARNING Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt which could result in serious injury or death DRIVER MEMORY SEAT IF EQUIPPED This feature allows the driver to store up to two different memory profiles for easy recall through a memory switch Each memory profile contains desired position settings for the driver seat side mirrors and power tilt and telescopic steering column if equipped and a set of desired radio station presets Your Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter can also be programmed to recall the same positions when the UNLOCK button is pressed ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 NOTE Your vehicle is equipped with two RKE trans mitters One RKE transmitter can be linked to memory position 1 and the other transmitter can be linked to memory position 2 The memory seat switch is located on the driver s door trim panel The switch consists of three buttons e The S button which is used to activate the memory save function e The 1 and 2 buttons which are used to recall either of two pre programmed memory profiles Memory Seat Switch 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Sa Programming The Memory Feature NOTE To create a new memory profile perform the following Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter N Go i
6. 182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se HEATED STEERING WHEEL IF EQUIPPED The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps warm your hands in cold weather The heated steering wheel has only one temperature setting Once the heated steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for approximately 58 to 70 minutes before automatically shutting off The heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already warm The heated steering wheel can be turned on and off using the Uconnect System Touch the Controls soft key then touch the Heated Steering Wheel soft key to turn on the heated steering wheel Press the Heated Steering Wheel soft key a second time to turn the heated steering wheel off Pri gt Y sb Nav Phone More 2y Player OFF EVE Controls Clirnate Controls Soft Key UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183 t FM 95 5 70 on during a remote start Refer to Remote Starting Sys tem If Equipped in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information WARNING Controls x Driver Passenger e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaus tion or other physical conditions must exercise care when using the steering wheel heater It may Heated Heated Seat Seat em Heated Wh
7. e Electronic Park Brake Failure r i This telltale indicates that there is an Electronic Park Brake Fault Please see your authorized dealer for assistance EVIC Red Telltales This area will show reconfigurable red telltales These telltales include Door Ajar This light will turn on to indicate that one or more doors may be ajar Oil Pressure Warning Light 377 This telltale indicates low engine oil pressure If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns on Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not show how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood e Oil Temperature Warning Light This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is cr high If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible e Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system If the light stays on or comes on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s non essential electrical devices or increase engine speed if at idle If the charging system light remains on it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY See an autho rized dealer If jump starting is required refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What
8. 15 E Or Kilometers o o eo o eo S S S S 2 2 2 2 S 8 8 8 8 8 8 2 2 S S e eps e se SS Lepele alas af Additional Inspections E Inspect the CV joints X X X IUE Inspect front suspension tie rod MI ends and replace if necessary 2 E F Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your 8 vehicle for police taxi fleet 2 i off road or frequent trailer towing EN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 571 Mileage or time passed o o o e o o o 2 S 2 2 2 whichever comes tirs 9 9 9 9 89 8 8 8 amp S sl ele e e Alale Bl a RI 8 8 9 r s 9 sz Or Years 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 sw ssssssssssssss8s Sie si S SIES E 8 5 9 si als Inspect the brake linings parking brake function A X i i Inspect transfer case fluid X X X X X Additional Maintenance Replace engine air filter X X X X X Replace the air conditioning filter X X X X X X Replace spark plugs 3 6L engine Replace spark plugs 5 7L engine X x A X X M A l N T E N A N Cc E S e H E D U L E S 8 L 572 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Sx A Mileage or time passed o o o e o o o e S 2 2 2 Ss N whichever comes first 9 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 2 2 28 2 82 8 d amp 8 9 8 8 8 S8 8 9 2 s 9 s Or Years 2
9. WARNING Do not adjust the steering column while driving Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv ing with the steering column unlocked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death POWER TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN IF EQUIPPED This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column The power tilt telescoping steering column lever is located below the multifunction lever on the steering column UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181 NOTE For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat you can use your Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmit ter or the memory switch on the driver s door trim panel to return the tilt telescopic steering column to pre programmed positions Refer to Driver Memory Seat in this section for further information WARNING Do not adjust the steering column while driving Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv ing with the steering column unlocked could cause Power Tilt Telescoping Steering Column the driver to lose control of the vehicle Failure to To tilt the steering column move the lever up or down as follow this warning may result in serious injury or desired To lengthen or shorten the steering column pull death the lever toward you or push the lever away from you as desired
10. WARNING If the gross trailer weight is 3 500 Ibs 1 587 kg or more it is mandatory to use a weight distributing hitch to ensure stable handling of your vehicle If you use a Continued WARNING Continued standard weight carrying hitch you could lose control of your vehicle and cause a collision Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination NOTE The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs 68 kg allowance for the presence of a driver Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR Refer to Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certifi cation Label in Starting and Operating for further information ee STARTING AND OPERATING 457 WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision Tongue Weight TW The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be more than 10 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the maximum width of the front of
11. ee STARTING AND OPERATING 469 AutoStick Electronic Speed Control If Equipped e When using the AutoStick shift control select the e Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads highest gear that allows for adequate performance and avoids frequent downshifts For example choose 5 if the desired speed can be maintained Choose 4 or 3 if needed to maintain the desired speed e When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to e To prevent excess heat generation avoid continuous on n maximize fuel efficiency driving at high RPM Reduce vehicle speed as neces sary to avoid extended driving at high RPM Return to a higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road conditions allow 470 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Cooling System SNOW PLOW To reduce potential for engine and transmission over Snow plows winches and other aftermarket equipment heating take the following actions should not be added to the front end of your vehicle The airbag crash sensors may be affected by the change in the front end structure The airbags could deploy unexpect When stopped for short periods of time shift the trans edly or could fail to deploy during a collision mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed Highway Driving WARNING Do not add a snow plow
12. speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes Continued ty seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 111 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Air Bag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting see your authorized e dealer If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an authorized dealer Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is ino
13. vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions ESC cannot prevent col lisions including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning ESC also cannot prevent collisions resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappro priate driver input for the conditions Only a safe Continued 402 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Continued attentive and skillful driver can prevent collisions The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others The ESC system has two available operating modes in 4WD HIGH range and two wheel drive vehicles and one operating mode in 4WD LOW range High Range Four Wheel Drive Models Or Two Wheel Drive Models On This is the normal operating mode for ESC in AWD HIGH range and in two wheel drive vehicles Whenever the vehicle is started or the transfer case if equipped is shifted from 4WD LOW range or NEUTRAL back to 4WD HIGH range the ESC system will be in this On mode This mode should be used for most driving situations ESC should only be turned to Partial Off mode for specific reasons as noted below Partial Off This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the ESC OFF switch When in Partial Off mode t
14. weight limit of the child restraint Can the rear facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat Can the head restraints be removed Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt against the belt path of the child restraint Yes Yes center position only Yes Contact between the front passenger seat and the child restraint is allowed if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact In positions with cinching latch plates CINCH the buckle stalk may be twisted up to 3 full turns Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR retractor 102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Installing A Child Restraint with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor ALR 1 Place the child seat in the center of the seating position For some second row seats you may need to recline the seat and or raise the head restraint to get a better fit Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against the child seat 5 To lock the seat belt pull down on the shoulder part of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor Then allow the webbing to retract back into th
15. 240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the Park View Rear Back Up Camera Always check carefully behind your vehicle and be sure to check for pedestrians animals other vehicles ob structions or blind spots before backing up You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay attention while backing up Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death CAUTION e To avoid vehicle damage ParkView should only be used as a parking aid The ParkView camera is unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive path Continued CAUTION Continued e To avoid vehicle damage the vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen It is recom mended that the driver look frequently over his her shoulder when using ParkView NOTE If snow ice mud or any foreign substance builds up on the camera lens clean the lens rinse with water and dry with a soft cloth Do not cover the lens Turning ParkView On Or Off With Uconnect 5 0 1 Turn the Radio on 2 Press the Settings button 3 Press the Safety amp Assistance soft key 4 Press the check box soft key next to Parkview Backup Camera to enable disable ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241 NOTE A check mark will appear in the selection box to indic
16. 511 ll EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS 511 E REPLACEMENT PARTS 00 513 B DEALER SERVICE ierse tead anaa 0000 eee 513 ll MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES 514 Engine OH isole e eR RE en 514 Engine Oll Filter i ones s 518 Engine Air Cleaner Filter 518 Maintenance Free Battery 519 Air Conditioner Maintenance 520 Body Lubrication 0 000056 523 Windshield Wiper Blades Adding Washer Fluid Exhaust System oo sess 30 dade ne aa oes Cooling System 2 00 0 529 0 Brake System css ced n pidge ar 535 Front Rear Axle Fluid iles 537 508 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE Transfer Case 2e Rem heme ues 538 Automatic Transmission 538 Appearance Care And Protection From COFfOSIOfl insere a Ee E a a 541 E FUSES 22k egos enrii ieee dees 546 POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTER 546 B VEHICLE STORAGE xx2334 xg Y v3 e Es 555 B REPLACEMENT BULBS 1 243 RR 555 W BULB REPLACEMENT cmt 557 High Intensity Discharge Headlamps HID It EQuipped inc hos ERES REDOPp RR 557 Halogen Headlamps If Equipped 557 Front Turn Signal sess s messas e i aeea 558 Front Fog Lamps 0 0 0
17. ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant need to reset your cruise control ACC utilizes a radar sensor and a forward facing camera designed to detect a vehicle directly ahead of you NOTE e If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you ACC will maintain a fixed set speed e If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead ACC will apply limited braking or acceleration not to exceed the original set speed automatically to maintain a preset following distance while matching the speed of the vehicle ahead WARNING Adaptive Cruise Control ACC is a convenience system It is not a substitute for active driving involvement It is always the driver s responsibility to be attentive of road traffic and weather condi tions vehicle speed distance to the vehicle ahead and most importantly brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road condi tions Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain safe control of your ve hicle Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury Continued ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189 WARNING Continued The ACC system Does not react to pedestrians oncoming vehicles and stationary objects e g a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle e Cannot take street traffic and we
18. AREA riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly 110 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Exhaust Gas WARNING Continued WARNING e If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into follow these safety tips the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed e Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in system confined areas any longer than needed to move Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust your vehicle in or out of the area system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the If you are required to drive with the trunk liftgate vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is open make sure that all windows are closed and damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken
19. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable tow bar 14 Release the parking brake 476 STARTING AND OPERATING Emm NOTE e Steps 1 through 4 are requirements that must be met before pressing the NEUTRAL N button and must continue to be met until the shift has been completed If any of these requirements are not met before press ing the NEUTRAL N button or are no longer met during the shift then the NEUTRAL N indicator light will flash continuously until all requirements are met or until the NEUTRAL N button is released The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN position for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable If the ignition switch is not in the ON RUN position the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing A flashing NEUTRAL N position indicator light indicates that shift requirements have not been met If the vehicle is equipped with Quadra Lift air suspension the engine should be started and left running for a minimum of 60 seconds with all the doors closed at least once every 24 hours This process allows the air suspension to adjust the vehicle s ride height to compensate for temperature effects Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL N Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for normal usage 1 Bring the vehicle to a complete stop leaving it con nected to the tow vehicle 2 Firmly apply the parking br
20. Display After pressing the Display soft key the following settings will be available e Display Mode When in this display you may select one of the auto display settings To change Mode status touch and release the Day Night or Auto soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315 e Display Brightness With Headlights ON When in this display you may select the brightness with the headlights on Adjust the brightness with the and setting soft keys or by selecting any point on the scale between the and soft keys Then touch the arrow back soft key e Display Brightness With Headlights OFF When in this display you may select the brightness with the headlights off Adjust the brightness with the and setting soft keys or by selecting any point on the scale between the and soft keys Then touch the arrow back soft key e Set Language When in this display you may select one of three languages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions and the navigation system if equipped Touch the Set Language soft key and then touch the desired language soft key until a check mark appears next to the language showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Units When in this display you may select to have the EVIC odometer and navigation system if equipped changed between US and Metric units of
21. Display Warnings And Maintenance Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle Warning The ACC FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor warning will display and also a chime will indicate when conditions temporarily limit system performance This most often occurs at times of poor visibility such as in snow or heavy rain The ACC system may also become temporarily blinded due to obstructions such as mud dirt or ice In these cases the EVIC will display ACC FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor and the system will deactivate The ACC FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor message can sometimes be displayed while driving in highly reflective areas i e tunnels with reflective tiles or ice and snow The ACC system will recover after the vehicle has left these areas Under rare conditions when the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may temporarily occur NOTE If the ACC FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor warning is active Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control is still available For additional informa tion refer to Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control Mode in this section If weather conditions are not a factor the driver should examine the sensor It may require cleaning or removal of an obstruction The sensor is located in the center of the vehicle behind the lower grille ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203 To keep the ACC S
22. F95 10 Amp Rear Camera Red Trailer Tow Red Park Assist Steering Column F96 10 Amp Rear Seat Heater Control Module Red Switch Flashlamp F88 15 Amp Instrument Panel Charger Blue Cluster If Equipped F90 F91 20 Amp Power Outlet Rear F97 25 Amp Rear Heated Yellow seats Selectable Natural Seats amp Heated F92 10 Amp Rear Console Steering Wheel Red Lamp If Equipped If Equipped F93 20 Amp Cigar Lighter F98 25 Amp Front Heated Yellow Natural Seats If Equipped F94 10 Amp Shifter Transfer F99 10 Amp Climate Control Red Case Module Red Driver Assistance Systems Module 554 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Car Micro Description tridge Fuse Fuse F100 10 Amp Active Damping Red If Equipped F101 15 Amp Electrochromatic Blue Mirror Smart High Beams If Equipped F103 10 Amp Cabin Heater Red Diesel engine only F104 20 Amp Power Outlets Yellow Instrument Panel Center Console CAUTION When installing the power distribution center cover it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so may allow water to get into the power distribution center and possibly result in an electrical system failure When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload If a properly ra
23. Fuel Mode 000 359 Electrical Outlet Auxiliary Power Outlet 260 Electric Rear Window Defrost 278 Electric Remote Mirrors 0000 126 Electronic Brake Control System 397 Brake Assist System acer skeat 00000005 399 Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM 400 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 184 Electronic Stability Control ESC 400 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 292 Emergency In Case of Freeing Vehicle When Stuck 496 Hazard Warning Flasher 0 480 Jump Staring ee ra nere ie eee 492 TOW HOOKS cere ee dp ia esini tusi 498 Emission Control System Maintenance 511 Engine Air Cleaner i epee ee e ae s 518 Block Heater mee RR Ree oe 356 Break In Recommendations 108 Compartment ssa ewes nnm RR Cd 509 Compartment Identification 509 Cooling strays he HBG caja bain a desig wld Res 529 590 INDEX eee Exhaust Gas Caution llle 48 Fails t Start er seeti aa ee es 354 Flooded Starting 225i ERR Res 354 Fuel Requirements mataia a a daai 442 Jump Starting evadere i etta eassa 492 OM eee tee EE E E E 514 Oil Filler Cap i ouk dood a wes ds 516 Oil Selection s uos db onec meae e dos 515 Oil Synthetie Lcec sudes ete eee ean e Rs 517 Overheating crc sisi ao e Ra 480 Otar lp 24 greed ta eh bone Rete d totes
24. MIN dot The fluid level must be kept within these two dots Do not add fluid above the MAX mark because leakage may occur at the cap With disc brakes the fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake linings wear However an unexpected drop in fluid level may be caused by a leak and a system check should be conducted Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information 536 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE WARNING e Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and or impair its performance The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times Brake Continued WARNING Continued fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or pro longed braking resulting in sudden brake failure This could result in a collision Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts cau
25. PARKSENSE OFF for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE ParkSense when on will reduce the volume of the radio when it is sounding a tone Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly taking care not to scratch or damage them The sensors must not be covered with ice snow slush mud dirt or debris Failure to do so can result in the system not working properly The ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle behind or in front of the fascia bumper or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind or in front of the fascia bumper Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense system off if objects such as bicycle carriers trailer hitches etc are placed within 12 in 30 cm from the rear fascia bumper Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem causing the PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED message to be displayed in the instrument cluster ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237 On vehicles equipped with a tailgate ParkSense WARNING should be disabled when the tailgate is in the lowered or open position A lowered tailgate could provide a e Drivers must be careful when backing up even false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle when using ParkSense Always check carefully behind your vehicle look behind you and be sure CAUTION e ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obs
26. The power mirror switch is located on the driver s side door trim panel Power Folding Mirror Switch 030409528 m Power Mirror Switch 1 Mirror Direction Control 2 Mirror Selection Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by the optional Memory Seat Feature Refer to Driver UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 Memory Seat in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information Outside Automatic Dimming Mirrors If Equipped The drivers outside mirror will automatically adjust for glare from vehicles behind you This feature is controlled by the inside automatic dimming mirror The mirrors will automatically adjust for headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts Heated Mirrors If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This feature can be activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster if equipped Some vehicles may not be equipped with rear window defroster in this case the heated mirrors will still function as intended Refer to Rear Window Features in Understanding The Fea tures Of Your Vehicle for further information 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Tilt Mirrors In Reverse Available With Memory Seat Only If Equipped Tilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirror positioning which will aid the drivers view of the ground rearward of the front doors Outside mirr
27. Vehicle performance may be severely degraded and the engine may stall In some situations the transmission may not re engage if the engine is turned off and restarted The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL may be illuminated A message in the instrument cluster will inform the driver of the more serious conditions and indicate what actions may be necessary In the event of a momentary problem the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps NOTE In cases where the instrument cluster message indicates the transmission may not re engage after en gine shutdown perform this procedure only in a desired location preferably at your authorized dealer 1 Stop the vehicle 2 Shift the transmission into PARK if possible 3 Turn the engine OFF 4 Wait approximately 30 seconds ee STARTING AND OPERATING 367 5 Restart the engine 6 Shift into the desired gear range If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset we recom mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur If the transmission cannot be reset authorized dealer service is required Paddle Shift Mode Paddle Shift is a driver interactive transmission feature providing manual shift control giving you more con
28. back soft key es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327 PhonelBluetooth After pressing the Phone Bluetooth soft key the follow ing settings will be available e Paired Devices This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone Bluetooth system For further information refer to the Uconnect Access User s Manual Air Suspension If Equipped After pressing the Suspension soft key the following settings will be available e Auto Entry Exit Suspension When this feature is selected the vehicle lowers the suspension for easy entry exit Touch the box next to your selection and a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated e Suspension Display Messages When All is selected all the Air Suspension Alerts will be displayed When Warnings Only is selected only the Air Suspension Warnings will be displayed e Tire Jack Mode When this feature is selected the air suspension system is disabled to assist with changing a spare tire Touch the box next to your selection and a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated e Transport Mode When this feature is selected the air suspension system is disabled to assist with flat bed towing Touch the box next to your selection and a check mark appears next to 32
29. but do NOT pull the door handle the doors will automatically lock after 60 seconds To Unlock From The Driver s Side With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft 1 5 m of the driver s door handle grab the driver s front door handle to unlock the driver s door automatically The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked Grab The Door Handle To Unlock NOTE If Unlock All Doors 1st Press is programmed all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the driver s front door handle To select between Unlock Driver Door 1st Press and Unlock All Doors 1st Press refer to Uconnect in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 To Unlock From The Passenger Side With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft 1 5 m of the passenger door handle grab the front passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automati cally The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked NOTE All doors will unlock when the front passenger door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver s door unlock preference setting Unlock Driver Door 1st Press or Unlock All Doors 1st Press Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE Transmitter In Vehicle To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle the Passive Entry system is equip
30. could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children and do not leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may A cause serious injury or death CAUTION An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always remove the Key Fob from vehicle cycle the ignition OFF and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended Continued 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthor ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter a Keyless Ignition Node KIN and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle After cycling the ignition to the ON RUN position the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the b
31. image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE The image will be displayed on the Navigation Multimedia radio display screen along with a caution note to check entire sur roundings across the top of the screen After five sec onds this note will disappear The ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear License plate When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with camera delay turned OFF the rear camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen appears again es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239 When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with camera delay turned ON The rear view image with dynamic grid lines will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of REVERSE unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 MPH the transmission is shifted into PARK or the ignition is switched to the OFF position When displayed dynamic grid lines will illustrate the width of the vehicle while a dashed center line will indicate the center of the vehicle to assist with aligning to a hitch receiver The static grid lines will show separate zones that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle The following table shows the approximate distances for each zone Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle Red 0 1 ft 0 30 cm Yellow 1 ft 3 ft 30cm 1 m Green 3 ft or greater 1 m or greater
32. on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way review this information to tow your load as efficiently the brakes operate and safely as possible To maintain warranty coverage follow the requirements CAUTION and recommendations in this manual concerning ve Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR hicles used for trailer towing 5 or the maximum front and rear GAWR If you do Common Towing Definitions parts on your vehicle can break or it can change the way your vehicle handles This could cause you to lose control Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not 456 STARTING AND OPERATING ME exceed the GVWR Refer to Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certification Label in Starting and Operating for further information Gross Trailer Weight GTW The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or tem porary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale
33. properly secure the spare tire with the special wing nut torqued to 3 7 ft lbs 5 N m reinstall the jack and tool kit foam tray and latch the rear load floor cover WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided Have the deflated flat tire repaired or replaced immediately Stowed Spare EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 491 Road Tire Installation 4 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased Pia a ORIG leverage Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until 2 Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped each nut has been tightened twice The correct tight end of the nut toward the wheel Lightly tighten the ness of each lug nut is 110 ft lbs 150 N m If in doubt lug nuts about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or service WARNING station To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack 5 After 25 miles 40 km check the lug nut torque with a do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly been lowered Failure to follow this warning may seated against the wheel result in personal injury 3 Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise 492 WHAT TO DO
34. reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low EEEE X X A X STARTING AND OPERATING 425 Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation Radial Ply Tires The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
35. steering components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only manufacturer s recom mended power steering fluid If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5 7L ENGINE ONLY IF EQUIPPED This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting off four of the engine s eight cylinders during light load and cruise conditions The system is automatic with no driver inputs or additional driving skills required NOTE This system may take some time to return to full functionality after a battery disconnect PARKING BRAKE Before leaving the vehicle make sure that the parking brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the PARK position The foot operated parking brake is located below the lower left corner of the instrument panel To apply the park brake firmly push the park brake pedal fully To release the parking brake press the park brake pedal a second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake disengage STARTING AND OPERATING 395 Parking Brake When the parking brake is applied with t
36. too high NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a particular disc it may be damaged i e scratched reflective coating removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc oversized or have protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES Under certain conditions the mobile phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the mobile phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile phone operation when not using Uconnect if equipped 332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CLIMATE CONTROLS General Overview The air conditioning and heating system is designed to Hard Keys make you comfortable in all types of weather This system can be operated through either the Automatic Climate Controls on the instrument panel or through the Uconnect system display The hard keys located below the Uconnect screen When the Uconnect system is in different modes Radio Player Settings More etc the driver and passenger temperature settings will be indicated at the top of the display 0456002846 Automatic Climate Controls Hard keys Soft Keys Soft keys are accessible o
37. will be felt within two to five minutes When the Hl level setting is selected the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation Then the heat output will drop to the normal Hl level If the HlI level setting is selected the system will automatically switch to LO level after a maximum of 60 minutes of continuous operation At that time the display will change from HI to LO indicating the change The LO level setting will turn OFF automati cally after a maximum of 45 minutes ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 Front Heated Seats With Uconnect 8 4 8 4A If Equipped There are two heated seat soft keys that allow the driver and passenger to operate the seats independently The controls for each heater are located in the Uconnect system screen Press the Controls soft key located on the bottom of the Uconnect display Press the Driver or Passenger seat soft key once to select HI level heating Press the soft key a second time to select LO level heating Press the soft key a third time to shut the heating elements OFF NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes When the Hl level setting is selected the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation Then the heat output will drop to the normal Hl level If the HlI level setting is selected the system will automatically switch to LO
38. 000 eves 558 Rear Tail Stop and Turn Signal Lamps 559 Rear Liftgate Mounted Tail Lamp 560 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp CHMSL 562 Rear License Lamp 0000000 562 B FLUID CAPACITIES 0048 563 E FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS etti tene ete as 564 ENGINE ue aig sex aha pad d eur as 564 Chas5i5 sited e RR EE DE RE ds 565 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 509 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3 6L 6 Air Cleaner Filter 7 Washer Fluid Reservoir 8 Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator 9 Engine Coolant Reservoir 1 Power Distribution Center Fuses 2 Engine Oil Dipstick 3 Engine Oil Fill 4 Brake Fluid Reservoir 5 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 510 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ENGINE COMPARTMENT 5 7L 071474393 1 Power Distribution Center 5 Washer Fluid Reservoir 2 Engine Oil Fill 6 Engine Oil Dipstick 3 Brake Fluid Reservoir 7 Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator 4 Air Cleaner Filter 8 Engine Coolant Reservoir es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 511 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well
39. 179 Wheel Heated uawa rocni iama cele ie ee eee 182 Wheel Tt lei RR REO RES 179 Steering Wheel Audio Controls 329 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls 329 StOIage em ee o y ace Ie ao Ee d FRU ae eqs Storage Vehicle ess Storing Your Vehicle lille Sunglasses Storage esteas speise saaie eee DUN ROO att aea e any oes nace Geta dpe Sun Visor Extension sd oo ea wey BS ay S Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 600 INDEX eee Suspension Aled isses ouo x aee rw eR Pc ns 378 Sway Control Trailer ss bre tm ea 403 Synthetic Engine Oil 4 eie Rr 517 System Remote Starting 0 00000 ee 28 Tachometer 3 as edits e E desde 285 Telescoping Steering Column 179 Temperature Control Automatic ATC 339 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 288 Tie Down Hooks Cargo 2 2 eee ee 275 Tilt Steering Column reae eiere g hirit nua 179 Tire and Loading Information Placard 417 Tire Markings soe sea n a sea aie ee ae RE oad 411 TeS e zucca eG Ca ER RR dE OR EROS TS 113 Aging Life of Tire eese 430 Aur Pressure coss rede Gate ate deb a 422 Chaise s siente adt acus eia ane 433 Compact Spare iaces c a hob aes a ete d 427 General Information High Speed ixi eae re RO UR Read 425 Inflation Pressures 0 0 0 0 cece eee 423 Lite of Tires setiger irei 488444 039056404 430 Load Capacity xw ee RR EE RES oS 417
40. 515 Synthetie c m ee ee Be hae 517 MISCOSITY iu ae ube gae der d a dea RR IR eae s 516 Oil Filter Selection llle 518 Onboard Diagnostic System 00 511 Opener Garage Door HomeLink 244 Operating Precautions eiaeia imt 511 Operator Manual Owner s Manual 6 Outside Rearview Mirrors llle sss 125 Overhead Console 00000000000 eee 241 Overheating Engine 0 000 20 n 288 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 6 Paint Cares cx esana a aha rM POR RD CR Re iude E 541 Panic Alattn us tw zum we E rne RR s 26 Parking Brake s ue ree pet Reg edens 395 Park Sense System Rear 0000 218 Passing DASA ss nai ce rrt hoe Sb aay eh deb eta 174 P etS cu e be b ER bd mde m PR Rs 108 Pets Iransportng i seas eom E RR e ace 108 Placard Tire and Loading Information 418 Power Distribution Center Fuses 0 546 Door Locks ges Rx Rc o RPRET eas 34 IVETE xe rete Bee irte RI eA ES 265 Lift Gate i cue rra REEE LEENE REER 46 MITOS pu once hu eke en mrt eh hokage oo 126 Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 260 Seals EXE uere REA ce SO esi 138 DIGOTIDB uses dox eS So Grau aes ck ed ase us 392 SUDEOOE 24 Libros eive3TG PS PEE NS 253 Tilt Telescoping Steering Column 180 WindOWS 53 acce acra eade acie do anie eO ERR 41 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 67 Prepar
41. Amber Telltales seres 303 282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se ll STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS IF EQUIPPED eese 329 Radio Operation 000 330 CD Player eue eke Se E ER eae gos 330 E CD DVD BLU RAY DISC MAINTENANCE 381 ll RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES 3831 B CLIMATE CONTROLS 332 General Overview 00 0 0 ee 332 Climate Control Functions 338 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 339 Operating lips ss eti ree gone 341 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 040174242 1 Air Outlet 6 Lower Switch Bank 11 Hood Release 2 Instrument Cluster 7 Hazard Switch 12 Fuel Door Release 3 Radio 8 Storage Bin SD Card AUX USB Media Hub 13 Headlight Switch 4 Glove Compartment 9 ESC Button 14 Dimmer Control 5 Climate Controls 10 Ignition Switch 284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 0403001210 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Tachometer Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute RPM x 1000 2 Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is first turned to the ON RUN position this light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check During the bulb check if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled a chime will
42. Customer Programmable Features Uconnect Access 8 4 Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter To Memory Your RKE transmitters can be programmed to recall one of two pre programmed memory profiles by pressing the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter NOTE Before programming your RKE transmitters you must select the Memory To FOB feature through the Uconnect system screen Refer to Customer Program mable Features Uconnect Access 8 4 Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation To program your RKE transmitters perform the following 1 Remove the Key Fob from the ignition or change the ignition to OFF for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go 2 Select desired memory profile 1 or 2 NOTE If a memory profile has not already been set refer to Programming The Memory Feature for instruc tions on how to set a memory profile 3 Once the profile has been recalled press and release the SET S button on the memory switch then press and release button 1 or 2 accordingly Memory Profile Set 1 or 2 will display in the instrument cluster on vehicles equipped with the EVIC 4 Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter within 10 seconds 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked to your memory setting
43. Driver Side Knee Air Bag The trim cover separates and 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se folds out of the way allowing the air bag to inflate to the full size The air bag fully inflates in about 15 to 20 mil liseconds Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Inflator Units During collisions where the impact is confined to a particular area of the side of the vehicle the ORC may deploy the SABIC air bags depending on the severity and type of collision In these events the ORC will deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle A quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the SABIC The inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window The SABIC inflates in about 30 milliseconds about one quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the SABIC inflates This especially applies to children The SABIC is only about 3 1 2 in 9 cm thick when it is inflated Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed NOTE In a rollover the pretensioners and or SAB and SABIC air bags and driver passenger knee air bags may deploy on both sides of the vehicle Front And Side Impact Sensors In front and side impa
44. EE OR REXSG 141 Rear Folding Re d ees us 154 Recining scce reens saes e e es 144 Security Against Theft 0004 20 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 20 Selec Terrain llle 376 Sentry Key Immobilizer 18 Sentry Key Programming 00004 19 ee INDEX 599 Sentry Key Replacement ecesas etima rasiat ng 19 Service Assistance naaa 577 Service Contract re scias eda stanar miei baai 579 Service Manuals 0 0 00 eee eee eee 582 Shifting s SESE ee RR ee REL ER ens 357 Automatic Transmission 357 Shoulder Belts 4 0 6 24 ritrae i ee do eode p dead 52 Side Airbag gc nag ie er n e PR oa 77 Signals LHED sre tee qun d we RUE aco a Rahat 113 SmartBeams lee 166 Snow Chains Tire Chains 0 433 Snow Plo w iio ese wa ex ek va es 470 Snow Tes aat aaa aS ade Ae go Siw de have aa 426 Spare T6 u wae gun Rp ang anaes 427 Speed Control Cruise Control issu 184 opeedoreter coms cerent DER a ha 286 sri 28 Automatic Transmission 351 Cold Weather llle 354 Engine Block Heater soest imas iania sat esea 356 Engine Fails to Start lille 354 Remote 422g x i ebd hea tw read 28 Starting and Operating 005 351 Starting Procedures cesse ee eed 351 Steering Power oseca di enee ria rE ett keg we 392 Tilt Columi sere ike Id et RR
45. EVIC will display single arc in the left and or right rear regions based on the park assist ready system st atus the object s distance and location relative to the vehicle If an object is detected in the left and or right rear region the display will show a single arc in the left and or right rear region and the system will produce a tone As the vehicle moves closer to the object the display will show P the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone R will change from a single 1 2 second tone to slow to fast N to continuous D S Park Assist oooR8 d ooo 032774503 Park Assist Ready UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221 j j 3 EL SE 032774502 032774501 0 UZ 002 Single 1 2 Second Tone Slow Tone 222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 0 0 0 023 0029 SEA S Ls e 032774499 Fast Tone Continuous Tone The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone The following chart shows the warning alert opera tion when the system is detecting an obstacle ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223 WARNING ALERTS Reduced Rear Distance Greater than 79 39 in 39 25 in 25 12 in Less than in cm 79 in 200 cm 200 100 cm 100 65 cm 65 30 cm 12 in 30 cm Audible Alert None Single 1 2 Slow Fast Continuous Chime Second Tone Arc None 4th Solid 3rd 2nd 1st Solid Fla
46. Fixed Speed Cruise Control is set the set speed can be decreased by pressing and holding the SET button If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph 10 km h increments until the button is released The decrease in set speed is reflected in the EVIC display To Accelerate For Passing Press the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control WARNING Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed Your ve hicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control and have an accident Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery 188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL ACC IF EQUIPPED Adaptive Cruise Control ACC increases the driving convenience provided by cruise control while traveling on highways and major roadways However it is not a safety system and not designed to prevent collisions
47. IN EMERGENCIES EE JUMP STARTING WARNING If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully Preparations For Jump Start Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury NOTE When using a portable battery booster pack The battery in your vehicle is located under the passen follow the manufacturer s operating instructions and ger s front seat There are remote locations located under precautions the hood to assist in jump starting CAUTION Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery starter motor alternator or electrical system may occur WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 493 WARNING e Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition switch is ON You can be injured by moving fan blades e Remove any metal jewelry such as rings watch bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent electrical contact You could be seriously injured e Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your cera skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive Keep open flames
48. LightService oo csse mn 558 Folding Rear Seat l l 154 Forward Collision Warning llle 213 Four Way Hazard Flasher 480 Four Wheel Drive 0 0000 ee eee 369 OperatiOti desde ae eateries me donee Rees 369 SYSTEMS osa eed ee ned eee ade ee ae 369 Four Wheel Drive Operation 369 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle 0 0 496 Front Axle Differential 00 537 Fuel ig 28 aote aise od Begnd tated Smee an ee Bea ee a 442 PAGING MMC PLE 450 Additives zs so 6c anda Gch ane dog Gud Ed 445 Clean Air s ird oceans acd eee wi Raid 443 Economy Mode sees 359 Ethanol 5 ad dean RR e Bid E ded 443 E Lll s 4 6 0 340 9440 9 2458 98 ne POA REARS 442 Ga pe i oes oe eee Ree der be x 290 Materials Added 0 0 00 0 eee 445 Methanol supr ina iea eaa REG Y 443 Octane Rating s ese eadeni eR RR REG 442 Requirements 6 0 442 Tank Capacity eese oo eae tas dee oe 563 Fuel Flexible 0 ee es 446 Fueling 2262s e ep Ree en aes 450 Fus S ive ha ex ek E ELETG LE SY V h 546 Garage Door Opener HomeLink Gasoline Clean Air llle 592 INDEX BENE Gasoline Fuel 0 02 00 442 Gasoline Reformulated llle 443 Gauges Coolant Temperature llle 288 Fuels gere Saad eed ERA E eus 290 Speedometer uses ende e erp eun a ees de 286 Tachometer eriei e Rc a ete ee des 285 Gear Ranges eal seta d
49. Lights And Wiring gt O Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size C RC ram stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety 2 1 G5 The Trailer Tow Package may include a four and seven pin wiring harness Use a factory approved trailer har ness and connector r 057003766 Four Pin Connector NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles 1 Female Pins 4 Park wiring harness 2 Male Pin 5 Left Stop Turn 3 Ground 6 Right Stop Turn 468 STARTING AND OPERATING 7 ont o o 604 149 Seven Pin Connector 5 Ground 6 Left Stop Turn 7 Running Lamps 1 Battery 2 Backup Lamps 3 Right Stop Turn 4 Electric Brakes Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing the trailer up in an area away from heavy traffic Automatic Transmission The DRIVE range can be selected when towing The transmission controls include an adaptive drive strategy to avoid frequent shifting when towing However if frequent shifting does occur while in DRIVE you can use the AutoStick shift control to manually select a lower gear NOTE Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions will improve perfor mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces sive shifting and heat buildup This action will also provide better engine braking
50. M ML M o co 267 DEUS Power shade EADIE saei 298 Glove Compartment 00 0 267 a ae oa Doot Storage aas b LR dee PES Goh eas 268 CHENG EOWOE QUOC os EXDIGSSG s scitis 298 Console Features llle 269 Closing Power Shade Manual Mode 259 E CARGO AREA FEATURES sss 271 Pinch Protect Feature 2 2 2222 ees 259 Rechargeable Flashlight 271 Wind B ffeling open RR Ress 259 Cargo Storage Bins cece eee e eee eee 272 Sunroof Maintenance isses 260 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Retractable Cargo Area Cover E REAR WINDOW FEATURES 277 oi oes a ee ado dU Rear Window Wiper Washer 277 Rear Cargo De DOWNS cvacuee Ciens hess era Rear Window Defroster lesus 278 ll ROOF LUGGAGE RACK IF EQUIPPED 279 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle It is a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the wind shield The mirror installs on the windshield button with a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for mounting The mirror head can be adjusted up down left and right for various drivers The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the nig
51. Maintenance sellers 538 SD fling xot epe cedes Dale 357 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry 26 Transmitter Garage Door Opener HomeLink 244 Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless Entry 23 Transmitter Remote Keyless Entry RKE 23 Tread Wear Indicators 0 0000 ee 430 TurnSipnals ique de ge aoe ha Behe aa Re eb fs 286 Uniform Tire Quality Grades 0 0 583 Universal Transmitter lesser 244 Unleaded Gasoline leise 442 Untwisting Procedure Seat Belt iiis 58 Vanity Mirrors see srera od e a ROI a E e RACE e 128 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 8 602 INDEX eee Vehicle Loading 5432 em x em 418 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 9 Mehicle Stotageu s iu dide bb EA sie P des 341 Viscosity Engine Qil siesta mai amaai ee 516 Warning Flasher Hazard ss e siset sranti resita 480 Warning Roll Over 0 0 0 0 eee eee eee 5 Warnings and Cautions 0006 8 Warranty Information 0 005 580 Washers Windshield 0000005 174 Washing Vehicle t ise keep es 542 Wheel and Wheel Trim illie 543 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 0 543 Wind Buffeting llle 44 Window Fogging eee 342 WindOWS cesikera vd exe LEG MOX GU B3 Ys 41 POWT uro cesso ae putei See Sociis ae See td 41 Windshield Defroster cs ccs sera llis 1
52. Maintenance Schedule 000000 ee 568 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 286 Manual Service siase eseme eee ees 582 Memory Feature Memory Seat 156 Memory Seat ees re Seka e us ee n 156 Memory Seats and Radio 0 156 Methanol i422 S06 oan PAD eR ae 3 443 Mirrors amp 2iaciuoe EG exc a e i X ae RUE 123 Electric Powered 0 00 ce ee eee 126 Electric Remote llle 126 Exterior Folding illl 125 Heated uuu Sees GAS He dex EG ea Ges 127 O tsIde s esae es d bacca a eb kVECE Cx eden 125 Re rview i129 daa Age Rex OR S UR aaa 123 Vanity aces caca ene kom ae Rab alas Kee adhi 128 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 9 Monitor Tire Pressure System Mopar Parts 9293 xs oem eade Bad eae 513 MTBE ETBE Multi Function Control Lever 00 163 New Vehicle Break In Period 108 Occupant Restraints Occupant Restraints Sedan Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel Odometer 2 0 leeren Trip Off Pavement Driving Off Road Off Road Driving Off Pavement Oi EDI Cie os uetus Rire Ming Pacha hak we ae Capacity Change Interval Dipstick x dite tale ERR etm CRAS nnd Disposal saves arte d C ah ed E em eid Filter 506 INDEX es Filter Disposal iges isese Rem eem ees 517 Identification LOgO iste Had dein 516 Materials Added to 00000 517 Recommendation 0 000000 e eee
53. Non FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E 85 perform the following e drain the fuel tank see your authorized dealer change the engine oil and oil filter disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the engine controller memory More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E 85 fuel MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline ee STARTING AND OPERATING 445 Materials Added To Fuel CAUTION Continued e An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate ser vice Contact your authorized dealer for service All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional
54. ON RUN position and press and hold the two outside HomeLink buttons I and III for up 20 seconds or until the red indicator flashes NOTE Erasing all channels should only be performed when programming HomeLink for the first time Do not erase channels when programming additional buttons If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance 246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Programming A Rolling Code For programming garage door openers that were manu factured after 1995 These garage door openers can be identified by the LEARN or TRAIN button located where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door opener It is NOT the button that is normally used to open and close the door The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer 0000 Training The Garage Door Opener 1 Door Opener 2 Training Button E UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247 T 2 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 in 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to pro gram while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink button you want to program and the hand held trans mitter button Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi cator light The HomeLink
55. Pressure Monitor System TPMS 435 Pressure Warning Light 0 290 Quality Grading esst a mir irena ia hiai 583 Radial peroo sv ed echo eee ded eee S 425 Replacements 024s oud DRE eo gs 431 Rotation seeriana cR eR oe ERRORS reds 434 Safety asad ths vus yd esa qn eds em AEE 411 SIZES ues be SESS SEES eRe Peake s 413 SHOW Wires z ducere ERE Qe a eee edew E 426 Spare ire dra see ude ee ae ec gs 482 SPINNING s sd Res ps eS Td ene sei e 429 Trailer IOWIDB 42a nies degere 3 465 Tread Wear Indicators lille 430 Tire Safety Information s seca a esens ioraa a 411 a INDEX 601 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 462 Tow Hooks Emergency ss ssas awara iaa es 498 TOWING 5 od rure bige Ga epi aed weeds ws 455 Guide sae gi aai n Oe e a ee E 461 Recreational sed keket ereas 471 WeIShE sca aa p a S eens r A 461 Traction Control 22s sl et 00 0 398 Trailer Sway Control TSC 0 403 Trailer TOWNE ic passae UR Bee ees Rer 455 Cooling System Tips 0000005 470 lud M n 460 Minimum Requirements 463 Trailer and Tongue Weight 462 Wiring sed e RR e RE R EROR RR Ek ERG 467 Trailer Towing Guide llle 461 Trailer Weight cec isse me 461 Transter Case c cse ass RR ace EGER acws 538 Maintenance i e caw eka er a e we ee ee 538 Transmission iua 5 4ie 2 ee Phe Pa wee RS E wes 360 Automatic xu 56 Bed ues b RR PROP eae 360
56. Reclining Rear Seat 0 0040 156 DRIVER MEMORY SEAT IF EQUIPPED 156 Programming The Memory Feature 158 Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter To Memory 159 Memory Position Recall Ls 160 Easy Entry Exit Seat 6 llle 160 E TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD 162 B LIGHTS ys evs ads a ea ea ede ne 163 Headlight Switch 255r Rs 163 Automatic Headlights If Equipped 165 Headlights On Automatically With Wipers 165 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 Automatic High Beam If Equipped 166 Ambient Light cda eg ee ex uek 172 Daytime Running Lights If Equipped 167 Multifunction Lever sss acsress iesi sras 173 Automatic Headlight Leveling Turn Signals eas ined urs Sohal at dw 173 HID Headlights Only 167 Lane Change Assist ae fell ana diel E 167 Flash To Pass seen Headlight Delay sse 168 EUER Lew Bean SVMEDL stad dictate sa de da Parking Lights And Panel Lights 168 xu ME un Fog Lights If Equipped isses 168 Windshield Wiper Operation 175 Interior Lights lesse eee 169 UETERHHE oe a nm Lights On Reminder cec 170 Windshield Washer Operation 176 Battery Saver occ eee cee en 170 MEST LANES a s ne Fr
57. Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information An audible chime will be heard whenever a system error has been detected Operation The indicator lamps 3 through 6 will illuminate to show the current position of the vehicle Flashing indicator lamps will show a position which the system is working to achieve When raising if multiple indicator lamps are flashing on the Up button the highest flashing indica tor lamp is the position the system is working to achieve When lowering if multiple indicators are flashing on the Up button the lowest solid indicator lamp is the posi tion the system is working to achieve Pressing the UP button once will move the suspension one position higher from the current position assuming all conditions are met i e engine running speed below threshold etc The UP button can be pressed multiple times each press will raise the requested level by one position up to a maximum position of OR2 or the highest position allowed based on current conditions i e vehicle speed etc Pressing the DOWN button once will move the sus pension one position lower from the current level as suming all conditions are met i e engine running doors closed speed below threshold etc The DOWN button can be pressed multiple times Each press will lower the 304 STARTING AND OPERATING ME requested leve
58. Ride Height NRH if the transfer case is in high range The level will change to Off Road 1 if the transfer case is in Low range Auto Fully automatic full time four wheel drive operation can be used on and off road Balances traction with seamless steering feel to provide im proved handling and acceleration over two wheel drive vehicles If equipped with air suspension the level will change to NRH e Sand Off road calibration for use on low traction surfaces such as sand or wet grass Driveline is maxi mized for traction Some binding may be felt on less forgiving surfaces The electronic brake controls are set to limit traction control management of throttle and wheel spin If equipped with air suspension the level will change to Off Road 1 Mud Off road calibration for use on low traction surfaces such as mud Driveline is maximized for traction Some binding may be felt on less forgiving surfaces The electronic brake controls are set to limit traction control management of throttle and wheel spin If equipped with air suspension the level will change to Off Road 1 en STARTING AND OPERATING 377 e Rock Off road calibration only available in 4WD Low range The vehicle is raised if equipped with Air Suspension for improved ground clearance Traction based tuning with improved steer ability for use on high traction off road surfaces Activate the Hill De scent Control for steep downhill control Use for low speed
59. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort ably wrap around the occupant s mid section Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Automatic Locking Retractor Mode ALR If Equipped In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt The Automatic Locking Mode is avail able on all passenger seating positions with a combina tion lap shoulder belt Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating position that has a belt with this feature Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in the rear seat How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency locking mode E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 WARNING e The belt and retractor assembly must be replace
60. Te REGN 351 Temperature Gauge crs csi llle 288 Engine Oil Viscosity llle 516 Engine Oil Viscosity Chart sess 516 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 78 Entry System Illuminated 23 Ethan ll ere cages eee ba oie ea Kee a ace 443 Event Data Recorder 0 000 ce ee eens 82 Exhaust Gas Caution 0 00000 e eee eae 48 Exhaust System osie Doea a henn eae ex em aces 110 Exteri r Lights x css des Rea ed tp np s 113 Filters Air Cleaner s ccs ts AER aes Ee es 518 Air Condi Honing pesse idea au eru I RU desta 342 Engine Qil 6 beth dex e Ree gs 518 Engine Oil Disposal 000 517 Flashers ic cete acs a ea DUE er E CP eng 480 Hazard Warning 0006 480 T rn Signal s i22 seu eee Pere IURE 113 Flexible Fuel Vehicles Cruising Range sss re eR RES 449 Engine Ol uo ede eR Re den ayes 448 Fuel Requirements 0 00000005 446 Maintenance 6 6 eee 449 Replacement Parts 2 2 0 0 0 0 eee eee ee 449 DIAFUTDIP sciat oe ree 449 Flooded Engine Starting 200 354 Fluid Capacities i2 e e ers 563 Ehud Leaks ios aere Ree RR Aare nhe RR 113 Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transmission Ls 540 Brake nd dw Gil eri vare ede ded EP s 535 Engine OI eean ae ease su S ere alee ees dd 514 Power Steering 4 24 ela Rena ee n d es 394 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 564 Eog Lights c2 gm er ere ne asia eae 286 Fog
61. The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LT Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 Temporary spare tires are spares designed for tempo rary emergency use only Temporary high pressure compact spare tires have the letter T or S molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation Example T145 80D18 103M High flotation tire sizing is based on U S design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT ee STARTING AND OPERATING 413 Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE Size Designation P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT Light truck tire based on U S design standards T or S Temporary spare tire 31 Overall diameter in inches in 215 Section width in millimeters mm 65 Aspect ratio in percent Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section width in inches in R Construction code R means radial construction D means diagonal or bias construction 15 Rim diameter in inches in 414 STARTING AND OPERATING ME EXAMPLE Service D
62. The two control modes function differently Always confirm which mode is selected Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Operation The speed control buttons located on the right side of the steering wheel operates the ACC system Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons 1 NORMAL FIXED SPEED CRUISE CONTROL ON OFF 2 SET ACCEL 3 RESUME 4 SET DECEL 5 DISTANCE SETTING INCREASE 6 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL ACC ON OFF 7 DISTANCE SETTING DECREASE 8 CANCEL es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191 NOTE Any chassis suspension or tire size modifica tions to the vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive Cruise Control Activating Adaptive Cruise Control ACC You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is above 0 mph 0 km h The minimum Set Speed for the ACC system is 20 mph 30 km h When the system is turned on and in the READY state the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC dis plays ACC Ready When the system is OFF the EVIC displays Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Off NOTE You cannot enable ACC under the following conditions When in Four Wheel Drive Low e When you apply the brakes When the parking brake is set e When the automatic transmission is in PARK RE VERSE or NEUTRAL When the Vehicle speed is outside of the speed range e When the brakes are overheated When the driver door is open e When the driver seat belt is
63. This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance the Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers may wear down your battery IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action On the highways slow down Incity traffic while stopped place the transmission in NEUTRAL but do not increase the engine idle speed NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition e If your air conditioner A C is on turn it off The A C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A C off can help remove this heat e You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat the mode control to floor and the blower control to high This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system E WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 481 CAUTION Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads HOT H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointe
64. To Do In Emergencies UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305 e Electronic Throttle Control ETC Light y This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control ETC system The light will come on when the ignition is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an authorized dealer If a problem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position The light should turn off If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable However see an autho rized dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running immediate service is required You may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing 306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL e Engine Temperature Warning Light This light warns of an overheated engine condi tion As temperatures rise and the gauge ap proaches H this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H the indicator will continuously flash and a continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool If the light turns on while driving
65. VEHICLE Ses Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH Restraint System Anchor Tether We LATCH The next generation of child safety M J 022668173 Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor age system called LATCH which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren The LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH equipped child seats There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the seating position These anchorages are used to install LATCH equipped child seats without using the vehicle s seat belts Some seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages In these seating positions the seat belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the child restraint Please see the following table for more information LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle 022668566 Lower Anchor Top Tether Locations V Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating position Z4 Top Tether Anchorage Symbol THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91 92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Child Restraint LATCH Positions What is the weight limit child s weight 4 weight of the child restraint for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach the child restraint 65 Ibs 29 5 kg Use the LA
66. Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight GTW towable for your given drivetrain All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle HEC STARTING AND OPERATING 461 Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain Engine Model Frontal Area Gross Trailer Wt We See Note 3 6L 4x2 55 sq ft 5 11 sqm 6 200 lbs 2 812 kg 620 Ibs 281 kg 3 6L 4x4 55 sq ft 5 11 sqm 6 200 lbs 2 812 kg 620 Ibs 281 kg 5 7L 4x2 55 sq ft 5 11 sqm 7 400 lbs 3 357 kg 740 Ibs 336 kg 5 7L 4x4 55 sq ft 5 11 sqm 7 200 lbs 3 266 kg 720 lbs 327 kg 5 Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds NOTE The trailer tongue weight must be considered as require reducing trailer tongue load and Gross Trailer part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and Weight GTW Redistributing cargo to the trailer may should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire be necessary to avoid exceeding Rear Gross Axle Weight and Loading Information placard Refer to Tire Safety Rating GAWR of 3 700 Ibs 1 678 kg Information in Starting and Operating for further information The addition of passengers and cargo may 462 STARTING AND OPERATING Trailer An
67. YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS Uconnect amp RADIOS IF EQUIPPED For detailed information about your Uconnect radio refer to your Uconnect Supplement Manual iPod USB MP3 CONTROL IF EQUIPPED Located inside the center console upper lid this feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be plugged into the USB port iPod control supports Mini 4G Photo Nano 5G iPod and iPhone devices Some iPod software versions may not fully support the iPod control features Please visit Apple s website for software updates For further information refer to the Uconnect Access User s Manual IF EQUIPPED The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel Reach behind the wheel to access the switches fN Remote Sound System Controls Back View Of Steering Wheel 045035585 330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a push button in the center and controls the volume and mode of the sound system Pressing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume Pressing the center button will make the radio switch between the various modes available AM FM SXM CD AUX VES etc The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a push button in the center The function of the left hand control is different d
68. able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly 292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tion or sensor damage may result when using re placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result 16 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display Odometer Display The odometer display shows the total distance the ve hicle has been driven U S Federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced the repair technician should leave the odometer reading the same as it was before the repa
69. also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON RUN position The light should illuminate for ap proximately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON RUN position NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 14 Fuel GaugelFuel Door Reminder The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the vehicle where the fuel door is located The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the ON RUN position 15 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light l Fach tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291 vehicle placard or tire inflation pressur
70. and lower the door 3 Pivot the glove compartment downward 4 Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the filter cover to the HVAC housing and remove the cover 072607165 A C Air Filter Replacement 5 Remove the A C air filter by pulling it straight out of the housing 6 Install the A C air filter with the arrow on the filter pointing toward the floor When installing the filter cover make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the cover ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 523 CAUTION The A C air filter is identified with an arrow to indicate airflow direction through the filter Failure to properly install the filter will result in the need to replace it more often 7 Rotate the glove compartment door back into position Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate tailgate sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubri cated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPARQ Spray White Lube to assure quiet easy opera tion and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching compo nents to ensure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety
71. arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not If you remain in the vehicle and open a door the alarm will sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery becomes disconnected the Vehicle Security Alarm will remain armed when the battery is reconnected the exterior lights will flash the horn will sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm Tamper Alert If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in your absence the horn will sound three times and the exterior lights blink three times when you unlock the doors Check the vehicle for tampering en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 ILLUMINATED ENTRY IF EQUIPPED The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to unlock the doors or open any door This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the outside mirrors if equipped Refer to Mirrors in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for fur ther information The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition is cycled to the ON RUN position from the OFF position NOTE The front courtesy overhead console and door cour tesy lights will turn on if the dimmer control is in the Dome ON position extreme top position The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the dimmer control is
72. be replaced immediately 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Supplemental Active Head Restraints AHR These head restraints are passive deployable compo nents and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily identified by any markings only through visual inspec tion of the head restraint The head restraint will be split in two halves with the front half being soft foam and trim the back half being decorative plastic How The Active Head Restraints AHR Work The Occupant Restraint Controller ORC determines whether the severity or type of rear impact will require the Active Head Restraints AHR to deploy If a rear impact requires deployment both the driver and front passenger seat AHRs will be deployed When AHRs deploy during a rear impact the front half of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap between the back of the occupant s head and the AHR This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in certain types of rear impacts NOTE The Active Head Restraints AHR may or may not deploy in the event of a front or side impact However if during a front impact a secondary rear impact occurs the AHR may deploy based on the sever ity and type of the impact THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 CAUTION All occupants including the driver should not oper ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle s seat until the
73. belt still cannot be tightened after you shorten the buckle disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the buckle around one half turn and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still cannot make the child restraint installation tight try a different seating position es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 105 Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage c 1 Look behind the seating position where you l plan to install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage You may need to move the seat forward to provide better access to the tether anchorage If there is no top tether anchorage for that seating position see the charts above move the child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is available 2 To access the top tether strap anchorages behind the rear seat pull the carpeted floor panel away from the seat back this will expose the top tether strap anchorages 022633426 Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top Tether Strap 106 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M 3 Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints raise the head restraint and where possible route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the two posts If not possible lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap around
74. brake pedal not pressed could cause serious injury or death e e Battery at an acceptable charge level 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle To Enter Remote Start Mode Information Center EVIC If Equipped The following messages will display in the EVIC if the Press and release the REMOTE START button vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prema x2 on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec turely onds The parking lights will flash vehicle doors will lock and the horn will chirp twice if LN 2 programmed Once the vehicle has started the engine e Remote Start Aborted Hood Ajar will run for 15 minutes Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low NOTE e Remote Start Aborted System Fault e If your power door locks were unlocked Remote Start e Remote Start Disabled Start Vehicle to Reset will automatically lock the doors The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is turned Pe nbi erie PN ii n to the ON RUN position l e The park lamps will turn on and remain on during Remote Start mode ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 For security power window and power sunroof op eration if equipped are disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode The engine can be started two consecutive times two 15 minute cycles with the RKE transmitter However the ignition switch must be cycled to the O
75. button again NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START STOP Button 1 Place the shift lever in PARK then press and release the ENGINE START STOP button 2 The ignition switch will return to the OFF position 3 If the shift lever is not in PARK the ENGINE START STOP button must be held for two seconds and vehicle speed must be above 5 mph 8 km h before the engine will shut off The ignition switch position will remain in the ACC position until the shift lever is in PARK and the button is pressed twice to the OFF position If the shift lever is not in PARK and the ENGINE START STOP button is pressed once the EVIC if equipped will display a Vehicle Not In Park message and the engine will remain running Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK position or it could roll NOTE If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN engine not running position and the transmission is in PARK the system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the OFF position 354 STARTING AND OPERATING ME ENGINE START STOP Button Functions With Driver s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal In PARK Or NEUTRAL Position The ENGINE START STOP button operates similar to an ignition switch It has four positions OFF ACC RUN and START To change the ignition switch positions withou
76. catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner This will remove accumula tions of salt or road film Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield 524 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc NOTE Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use Poor perfor mance of blades may be present with chattering marks water lines or wet spots If any of these conditions are present clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary Rear Wiper Blade Removal Installation 1 Lift the pivot cap on the rear wiper arm upward this will allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the liftgate glass 072607741 1 Wiper Arm 2 Pivot Cap NOTE The rear wiper arm cannot be raised fully up ward unless the pivot cap i
77. comes first EN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 569 Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Check engine oil level Oil Change Indicator System e Check windshield washer fluid level ngeon an filter e Rotate the tires Rotate at the first sign of irregu Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual lar wear even if it occurs before the oil indicator wear or damage system turns on e Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir brake Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as master cylinder power steering and transmission as required needed e Inspect automatic transmission fluid if equipped with dipstick e Inspect brake pads shoes rotors drums hoses and park brake Check function of all interior and exterior lights Required Maintenance Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following e Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses pages for required maintenance e Inspect exhaust system e Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off road conditions M A N T E N A N Cc E S e H E D U L E S 8 L 570 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Sx A A W Maintenance Chart N T Mileage or time passed o o o o o o e o S 2 e 2 e E whichever comes firs 9 9 9 9 S9 8 8 S 9 9 8 8S 9 8 8 A amp 8s sg gsF e sS s s 2 8 9 8 j Or Years 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
78. do not leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle WARNING For personal security and safety in the event of a collision lock the vehicle doors before you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle Continued 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Power Door Locks The power door lock switch is located on each front door panel Press the switch to lock or unlock the doors 021809604 uu m Power Door Lock Switch If thelock knob is down when the door is closed the door will lock Therefore make sure the Key Fob is not inside the vehicle before closing the door If you press the door lock switch while the Key Fob is in the vehicle and the driver s door is open the doors will not lock If a rear door is locked it cannot be opened from inside the vehicle without first unlocking the door The door may be unlocked manually by raising the lock knob Child Protection Door Lock System Rear Doors To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats the rear doors are equipped with Child Protection Door Lock system To Engage Or Disengage The Child Protection Door Lock System 1 Open the rear door 2 Insert the tip of the emergency key into the lock and rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 3 Repea
79. echan Ro dere ad ed 472 Recreational Towing Quadra Trac II amp Quadra Drive amp II Four Wheel Drive Models 472 EE STARTING AND OPERATING 351 STARTING PROCEDURES Automatic Transmission Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust the The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK inside and outside mirrors fasten your seat belt and if position before you can start the engine Apply the brakes present instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat before shifting into any driving gear belts CAUTION WARNING Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children and do not leave a vehicle equipped with Enter N Go ACC or RUN position A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed e Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop e Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engi
80. either the up or down direction and release the switch To open the window part way press to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop Auto Down Window Switches Auto Up Feature With Anti Pinch Protection Driver And Front Passenger Door Only Lift the window switch fully upward to the second detent release and the window will go up automatically E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 To stop the window from going all the way up during the NOTE If the window runs into any obstacle during Auto Up operation push down on the switch briefly Auto Up it will reverse direction and then go back down Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window Any impact due to rough road condi tions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during Auto Up If this happens pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold it to close the window manually WARNING There is no anti pinch protection when the window To close the window part way lift the window switch to the first detent and release when you want the window to stop is almost closed Be sure to clear all objects from the window before closing Auto Up Window Switches 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Resetting The Auto Up Feature Should the Auto Up feature stop working the window probably needs to be reset To reset Auto Up 1 Pull the window switch up to close the wi
81. equipped is in its lowest position your authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the ex tender and store it WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision Only use when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating posi tions Remove and store the extender when not needed 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Supplemental Restraint System SRS Air Bags This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The passenger s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers In addition the vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the steering column and a Knee Bolster below the glove compartment 022674387 Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations 1 Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags 2 Knee Bolster 3 Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag NOTE The Driver and Front Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags are certified to the new Federal
82. explode and injure some one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h for more than 30 seconds continu ously when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed 430 STARTING AND OPERATING Tread Wear Indicators These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1 16 in 2 mm When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced Refer to replacement tires in this section for further information Life Of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced Driving style Tire pressure e Distance driven Performance tires tires with a speed rating of V or 055007576 higher and summer tires typically have a reduced tread life Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main phum pe tenance schedule is highly recommended 2 New Tire ee STARTING AND OPERATING 431 WARNING Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little ex
83. f Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets Bi Level Mode Pee Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets NOTE BI LEVEL mode is designed under comfort con ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets Floor Mode e Air comes from the floor outlets A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets Mix Mode w Air comes from the floor defrost and side window demist outlets This mode works best in cold or snowy conditions Defrost Mode Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side win dow defrosting and defogging When the defrost mode is selected the blower level may will increase 12 Climate Control OFF Button Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control ON OFF UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337 13 Driver Temperature Control Down Button Provides the driver with
84. further information Auto On Comfort amp Remote Start After pressing the Auto On Comfort amp Remote Start soft key the following settings will be available e Horn With Remote Start When this feature is selected the horn will sound when the remote start is activated To make your selection touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu 324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e Auto On Driver Heated Ventilated Seat amp Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start If Equipped When this feature is selected the driver s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40 F 4 4 C When tempera tures are above 80 F 26 7 C the driver vented seat will turn on To make your selection touch the Auto Heated Seats soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Engine Off Options After pressing the Engine Off Options soft key the fol lowing settings will be available e Engine Off Power Delay When this feature is selected the power window switches radio Uconnect phone system if equipped DVD video system if equipped power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ign
85. head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a collision NOTE For more information on properly adjusting and positioning the head restraint refer to Adjusting Active Head Restraints in Understanding The Features Of 022607508 n Your Vehicle Active Head Restraint AHR Components Resetting Active Head Restraints AHR 1 Head Restraint Front Half 3 Head Restraint Back Half Soft Foam and Trim Decorative Plastic Rear Cover If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in a collision 2 Seatback 4 Head Restraint Guide you must reset the head restraint on the driver s and Tubes front passenger seat You can recognize when the Active Head Restraint has been triggered by the fact that they have moved forward as shown in step three of the resetting procedure 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 1 Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat 3 Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism 1 4 022607492 022607497 Hand Positioning Points On AHR 2 Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR at 1 Downward Movement a comfortable position 2 Rearward Movement THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 022607757 a 022607494 AHR In Reset Position p 3 Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mechanism NOT
86. in 4WD LOW the engine speed is approximately three times that of the 4WD HI position at a given road speed Take care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h Proper operation of four wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size type and circumference on each wheel Any difference will adversely affect shifting and cause damage to the transfer case Because four wheel drive provides improved traction there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds Do not go faster than road conditions permit WARNING You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL N position without first fully engaging Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 371 WARNING Continued the parking brake The transfer case NEUTRAL N position disengages both the front and rear drive shafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move regardless of the transmission position The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle Shift Positions For additional information on the appropriate use of each transfer case mode position see the information below 4WD AUTO This range is used on surfaces such as ice snow gravel sand and dry hard pavement NOTE Refer to Selec Terrain If Equipped in Start ing and Operating for further information on the various positions and their intended us
87. in the Dome defeat position extreme bottom position REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors open the power liftgate or activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft 20 m using a hand held Key Fob with RKE transmitter The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es NOTE Driving at speeds 5 mph 8 km h and above disables the system from responding to all RKE transmit ter buttons for all RKE transmitters 0213003436 Key Fob With RKE Transmitter To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver s door or twice within five seconds to unlock all doors and liftgate The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal The illuminated entry system will also turn on If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry refer to Keyless Enter N Go under Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Remote Key Unlock Driver Door All Doors 1st Press This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s door or all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To change the current setting refer to Uconnect Settings in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE S
88. interior lights will automatically turn off If the headlights remain on while the ignition is cycled OFF the exterior lights will automatically turn off after eight minutes If the headlights are turned on and left on for eight minutes while the ignition is OFF the exterior lights will automatically turn off NOTE Battery saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is ON ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171 Front Map Reading Lights Each light can be turned on by pressing a switch on either ET side of the console These buttons are backlit for night d RR M py a time visibility To turn the lights off press the switch a second time The lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE is pressed 031433150 Front Map Reading Lights 031433151 Front Map Reading Light Switches 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Courtesy Lights Ambient Light The courtesy lights can be turned on by pressing the top The overhead console is equipped with an ambient light corner of the lens To turn the lights off press thelensa feature This light casts illumination for improved visibil second time ity of the floor center console and PRNDL area 031464435 033333449 Courtesy Lights Ambient Light HEEEEE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173 Multifunction Lever Turn Signals The multifunction lever is located o
89. level after a maximum of 60 minutes of continuous operation At that time the display will change from HI to LO indicating the change The LO level setting will turn OFF automati cally after a maximum of 45 minutes 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Rear Heated Seats On some models the two outboard seats are equipped with heated seats There are two heated seat switches that allow the rear passengers to operate the seats indepen dently The heated seat switches for each heater are located on the rear of the center console 030909669 Rear Heated Seat Switches You can choose from HIGH LOW or OFF heat settings Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use Two indicator lights will illuminate for HIGH one for LOW and none for OFF Press the switch once to select HIGH level heating Press the switch a second time to select LOW level heating Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements OFF NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes When the HIGH level setting is selected the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation Then the heat output will drop to the normal HIGH level If the HIGH level setting is selected the system will automatically switch to LOW level after ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation At that ti
90. lights to be operable If the ignition switch is not in the ON RUN position the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing A flashing NEUTRAL N position indicator light indicates that shift requirements have not been met WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS ll HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS 480 Bl IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS 480 Bl JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING 481 Jack Location x cse RR a e 482 Spare Tire Stowage 00000005 482 Preparations For Jacking 483 Jacking Instructions saetta snas ais saa 484 Road Tire Installation 491 B JUMP STARTING seeeeeennn 492 Preparations For Jump Start Jump Starting Procedure E FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ll EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS IF EQUIPPED ll MANUAL PARK RELEASE 8 SPEED TRANSMISSION ll TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE D Two Wheel Drive Models Four Wheel Drive Models 498 480 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Se HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the switch bank just above the climate controls A Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flasher When the switch is activated all direc tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency Press the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers
91. mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex haust system and adjacent body areas for broken dam aged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition have the exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 527 WARNING CAUTION Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Safety Tips Exhaust Gas in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that c
92. move in the intended direction of travel HSA Activation Criteria The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to activate e Vehicle must be stopped e Vehicle must be on a 6 approximate grade or greater hill Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction i e vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear vehicle back ing uphill is in REVERSE gear HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears when the activation criteria have been met The system will not activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL or PARK ee STARTING AND OPERATING 405 WARNING There may be situations on minor hills i e less than 8 with a loaded vehicle or while pulling a trailer when the system will not activate and slight rolling may occur This could cause a collision with another vehicle or object Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle Towing With HSA HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade when pulling a trailer WARNING e If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer your trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated with the brake switch If so when the Continued WARNING Continued brake pedal is released there may not be enough brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a hill and this could cause a collision with another vehicle or object behind you In order to avoid rolling down the hill while resuming acceleration manually a
93. near the vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is being filled Never add fuel when the engine is running This is in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to turn on Continued 452 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING Continued 4 Remove the storage bin A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a Pull the release cable portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release If you are unable to open the fuel filler door use the fuel filler door emergency release 1 Open the liftgate 2 Push down on the inboard edge of the left storage bin this will pop up the outboard edge a Release Cable 3 Grab popped up outboard edge with other hand to disengage snaps ee STARTING AND OPERATING 453 VEHICLE LOADING Certification Label As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin istration regulations your vehicle has a certification label affixed to the driver s side door or pillar This label contains the month and year of manufacture Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front and rear and Vehicle Identification Number VIN A Month Day Hour MDH number is included on this label and indicates the Month Day and Hour of manufacture The bar code that appears on the bottom of
94. of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON Run position Occupants particularly unattended children can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrap ment may result in serious injury or death Ina collision there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passen gers are also properly secured Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof Never allow your fingers other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result Opening Sunroof Express Press the switch rearward and release it within one half second The sunroof and sunshade will open auto matically from any position The sunroof and sunshade will open fully and stop automatically This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Opening Sunroof Manual Mode To open the sunroof press and hold the switch rearward to full open Any release of the switch will stop the movement The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward again Closing Sunroof Express Press the switch forward and release it within one half second and the sunroof will close automatically from any position T
95. or Remote Battery Posts sparks away from the battery 1 Remote Positive Post covered with protective cap 2 Remote Negative Post NOTE Be sure that the disconnected ends of the cables do not touch while still connected to the other vehicle 494 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE 1 Set the parking brake shift the automatic transmission Jump Starting Procedure into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK 2 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electri WARNING cal accessories Failure to follow this procedure could result in per sonal injury or property damage due to battery ex 3 Remove the protective cover over the remote posi plosion tive battery post Pull upward on the cover to remove it CAUTION 4 If using another vehicle to jump start the battery park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach set the Failure to follow these procedures could result in parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle WARNING NOTE Make sure at all times that unused ends of Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this jumper cables are not contacting each other or either could establish a ground connection and personal vehicle while making connections injury could result EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 495 1 Connect the positive 4 end of the jumper cable to the 5 Start the engine in the vehic
96. or equivalent With Trailer Tow Package ncludes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level 564 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Engine Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula OAT Organic Additive Technology Engine Oil 3 6L Engine We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W 20 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil 5 7L Engine We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W 20 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use MOPARO Engine Oil Filter or equivalent Spark Plugs 3 6L Engine We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs Gap 0 043 in 1 1 mm Spark Plugs 5 7L Engine We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs Gap 0 043 in 1 1 mm Fuel Selection 3 6L Engine 87 Octane Fuel Selection 5 7L Engine 87 Octane Acceptable 89 Octane Recommended ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 565 Chassis Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Automatic Transmission We recommend you only use Mopar ZF 8 amp 9 Speed ATF Automatic Trans mission Fluid or Shell L12108 Transmission Fluid Failure to use t
97. pair of sunglasses The storage compart second time ment access is a push push design Push the chrome pad on the door to open Push the chrome pad on the door to close 031464435 Courtesy Lights 033333448 Sunglasses Bin Door 244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE SS GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED HomeLink replaces up to three hand held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers motor ized gates lighting or home security systems The HomeLink unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt battery The HomeLink buttons located on either the overhead console headliner or sunvisor designate the three differ ent HomeLink channels The HomeLink indicator is located above the center button 034033576 HomeLink Buttons Overhead Consoles ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245 034000355 HomeLink Buttons Sunvisor Headliner NOTE HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Secu rity Alarm is active Before You Begin Programming HomeLink amp Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage before you begin programming For more efficient programming and accurate transmis sion of the radio frequency signal it is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand held transmitter of the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink system Erase all channels before you begin programming To erase the channels place the ignition in the
98. positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window 260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Sunroof Maintenance Use only a non abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel Ignition OFF Operation The power sunroof switches can be programmed to remain active for up to approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch has been turned OFF Refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features System Setup in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information NOTE Opening either front door will cancel this fea ture Sunroof Fully Closed Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the sunroof is fully closed ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt 13 Amp power outlets that can be used to power cellular phones small electronics and other low powered electrical accessories The power outlets are labeled with either a key or a battery symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered Power outlets labeled with a key are powered when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position while the outlets labeled with a battery are connected directly to the batt
99. rear cargo area below the load floor Jack Storage Location Spare Tire Stowage The spare tire is stowed under the load floor in the rear cargo area and is secured to the body with a special wing nut Preparations For Jacking CAUTION Always lift or jack the vehicle from the correct jacking points Failure to follow this information could cause damage to the vehicle or underbody components NOTE To assist with changing a spare tire the air suspension system has a feature which allows the auto matic leveling to be disabled 1 Park the vehicle on a firm level surface Avoid ice or slippery surfaces WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle closest to moving traffic pull far enough off the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 483 Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher Set the parking brake Place the shift lever into PARK Turn the ignition OFF 6 Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite of the jacking position For example if changing the right front tire block the left rear wheel oT A C N 060505162 NOTE Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked 7 For vehicles equipped with Quadra Lift refer to Quadra Lift If Equipped in Starting And Oper ating for further information on disabling automatic leveling 484 WH
100. regulations for Advanced Air Bags ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator design This allows the air bag to have different rates of inflation based on several factors including the severity and type of collision This vehicle may be equipped with driver and or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon seat position This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC to protect the driver front and rear passengers sitting next to a window The SABIC air bags are located above the side windows and their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB to provide enhanced protection for an occupant during a side impact The Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags are located in the outboard side of the front seats This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the steering column and a Knee Bolster mounted below the glove compartment NOTE Air Bag covers may not be obvious in
101. requested by the BSM system the radio is also muted e If the hazard flashers are on the system will request the appropriate visual alert only When the system is in RCP the system shall respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present Whenever an audible alert is requested the radio is also muted Turn hazard signal status is ignored the RCP state always requests the chime Blind Spot Alert Off When the BSM system is turned off there will be no visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems NOTE The BSM system will store the current operating mode when the vehicle is shut off Each time the vehicle is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and used 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE SS SEATS Power Seats If Equipped Seats are part of the Occupant Restraint System of the Some models may be equipped with eight way power vehicle driver and front passenger seats The power seat switches are located on the outboard side of the seat There are two WARNING switches that control the movement of the seat cushion ae a and the seatback e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts In a collision people riding in these are
102. s door passenger door other doors ignition after three minutes the headlights park lamps and or turn signals will flash for an additional 15 minutes NOTE The Panic and Security alarms are quite differ ent Please take a moment to activate the Panic and the Security modes to hear the differences in the horn In case one should go off in the future you will need to know which mode has been activated in order to deactivate it Rearming The System If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken to disarm it the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the horn after three minutes turn off all of the visual signals after 15 minutes and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 To Arm The System Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm 1 Remove the key from the ignition system refer to Starting Procedures in Starting And Operating for further information For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter N Go make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF and the key is physically removed from the ignition 2 Perform one of the following methods to lock the vehicle Press LOCK on the interior power door lock switch with the driver and or passenger door open Press the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry Door Handle with a va
103. safely pull over and stop the vehicle If the A C system is on turn it off Also shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve hicle If the temperature reading does not return to normal turn the engine off immediately and call for service Refer to If Your Engine Overheats in What To Do In Emergencies for more information e Electric Power Steering Malfunction If Equipped el e Liftgate Ajar This light will turn on to indicate that liftgate D may be ajar This telltale is on when the Electric Power Steering is not operating and needs service EVIC Green Telltales e Electronic Speed Control SET pr This telltale will illuminate green when the elec tronic speed control is SET For further infor mation refer to Electronic Speed Control in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307 EVIC Selectable Menu Items Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow buttons until the desired Selectable Menu icon is highlighted in the EVIC Digital Speedometer J Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button SPEED until the Digital display icon is highlighted in the kd EVIC Press and release the RIGHT arrow button to scroll through the sub menus and press the OK button to change the display between km h and mph Vehicle Info Customer Information Features ey Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Vehicle Info icon is highlighted in the EV
104. the OR1 position if the vehicle speed remains between 40 mph 64 km h and 50 mph 80 km h for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed exceeds 50 mph 80 km h the vehicle will be automatically lowered to NRH Refer to Off Road Driving Tips in Starting and Operating for further information Off Road 2 OR2 Raises the vehicle approximately 2 6 in 65 mm This position is intended for off roading use only where maximum ground clearance is required To enter OR2 press the Up button twice from the NRH position or once from the ORI position while vehicle speed is below 20 mph 32 km h While in OR2 if the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph 40 km h the vehicle height will be automatically lowered to ORI Refer to Off Road Driving Tips in Starting and Operating for further information Aero Mode Lowers the vehicle approximately 0 5 in 13 mm This position provides improved aerody namics by lowering the vehicle The vehicle will automatically enter Aero Mode when the vehicle speed remains between 62 mph 99 km h and 66 mph 106 km h for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed exceeds 66 mph 106 km h The vehicle will 380 STARTING AND OPERATING ME return to NRH from Aero Mode if the vehicle speed remains between 30 mph 48 km h and 35 mph 56 km h for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed falls below 30 mph 48 km h The vehicle will enter Aero Mode regardless of vehicle speed if the
105. the interior trim but they will open during air bag deployment e After any collision the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Air Bag System Components Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag system components Occupant Restraint Controller ORC Air Bag Warning Light e Steering Wheel and Column Instrument Panel Knee Impact Bolster Driver Advanced Front Air Bag e Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag e Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB e Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC e Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag e Front and Side Impact Sensors e Front Seat Belt Pretensioners Seat Belt Buckle Switch and Seat Track Position Sensors Advanced Front Air Bag Features The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC which may receive information from the front impact sensors The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag deployment This low output is used in less severe collisions A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 WARNING Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB Supplemental Seat Mounted
106. the label is your VIN Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle including driver passengers vehicle options and cargo The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and rear axle systems GAWR Total load must be limited so GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded Payload The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load weight a truck can carry including the weight of the driver all passengers options and cargo Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front and rear axles The load must be distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity axle springs tires or wheels Heavier axles or suspension components sometimes specified by purchasers for in creased durability does not necessarily increase the vehi cle s GVWR 454 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Tire Size The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents the actual tire size on your vehicle Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size Rim Size This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size listed Inflation Pressure This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR Curb Weight The curb weight of a vehicle is def
107. the outboard side of the head restraint VALLAALLLLIL 4 For the center seating position route the tether strap over the seatback and headrest then attach the hook to the tether anchor located on the back of the seat Top Tether Strap Anchorage Located on Seatback 5 Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 107 WARNING The top tether anchorages are not visible until the gap panel is folded down Do not use the visible cargo tie down hooks located on the floor behind the seats to attach a child restraint tether anchor Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage Center Seating Position For center seating position route the tether strap over the seatback and headrest then attach the hook to the tether anchor located on the back of the seat Top Tether Strap Mounting 6 Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions 108 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Transporting Pets Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not
108. time Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cause the seat heater to overheat Sitting Fold Flat Passenger Seat in a seat that has been overheated could cause Heated Seats If Equipped serious burns due to the increased surface tempera ture of the seat 030933466 On some models the front and rear seats may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and seatbacks 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Vehicles Equipped with Remote Start On models that are equipped with remote start the driver s heated seat and heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on during a remote start Refer to Remote Starting System If Equipped in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further informa tion Front Heated Seats With Uconnect 5 0 If Equipped There are two heated seat switches that allow the driver and passenger to operate the seats independently The controls for each heater are located in the Uconnect system screen You can choose from HIGH LOW or OFF heat settings Press the Climate hard key located on the right side of the Uconnect display Press the Driver or Passenger seat soft key once to select HI level heating Press the soft key a second time to select LO level heating Press the soft key a third time to shut the heating elements OFF NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat
109. to accelerate beyond the set speed If this occurs The message DRIVER OVERRIDE will display in the EVIC The system will not be controlling the distance be tween your vehicle and the vehicle ahead The vehicle speed will only be determined by the position of the accelerator pedal 194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se To Cancel Driver door is opened at low speeds The following conditions cancel the system e The driver switches ESC to full off mode The brake pedal is applied NOTE If ACC is resumed or set with the ESC TCS off e You depress the brake pedal ESC will automatically be re engaged You press the CANCEL switch TO Domo e An Anti Lock Brake System ABS event occurs The system will turn off and clear the set speed in memory if A Trailer Sway Control TSC event occurs You pach te Adie Crise Contol CACO e The transmission is shifted into NEUTRAL OFF button e The Electronic Stability Control Traction Control Sys e You push the Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control tem ESC TCS activates ON OFF button The vehicle parking brake is applied You turn OFF the ignition Driver seatbelt is unbuckled at low speeds You switch to Four Wheel Drive Low ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195 To Resume If there is a set speed in memory press the RES resume button and then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal The EVIC will display the last set speed NOT
110. to the OFF position and the wipers will cycle several times before returning to the parked position NOTE As a protective measure the pump will stop if the switch is held for more than 20 seconds Once the switch is released the pump will resume normal operation 036463509 Rear Wiper Washer Control 278 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned OFF the wiper will automatically return to the park position If the flipper glass is open the rear window wiper washer functionality is interrupted and the wiper stops at that park position When the flipper glass is closed the rear wiper will resume wiper washer functionality after five seconds Rear Window Defroster The rear window defroster button is located on the climate control panel Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors if equipped An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The rear window defroster automatically turns off after ap proximately 10 minutes For an additional five minutes of operation press the button a second time NOTE To prevent excessive battery drain use the rear window defroster only when the engine is operating CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements e Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Do not use abrasive window cleane
111. turning the jack screw clockwise CAUTION Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem surface and enough clearance is obtained to install facing outward The vehicle could be damaged if the the spare tire Minimum tire lift provides maximum spare tire is mounted incorrectly stability Rear Jacking Location WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 489 9 Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw counter clockwise and remove the jack and wheel blocks 10 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has been tightened twice The correct wheel nut tightness is 110 ft lbs 150 N m If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station 11 Lower the jack to the fully closed position and return mm Mounting Spare Tire it and the tools to the proper positions in the foam WARNING tray To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack 060633619 do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury 490 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME 12 Remove the small center cap and securely store the 13 Have the aluminum road wheel and tire repaired as road wheel in the cargo area soon as possible
112. waARNNG within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi HORNA tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle The instability could cause a collision Always use loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera radial ply tires in sets of four Never combine them tion Refer to your authorized tire or original equipment with other types of tires vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures Tire Repair 5 If your tire becomes damaged it may be repaired if it i d c High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi mum load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious collision Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above The puncture is no greater than V 6 mm 75 mph 120 km h e The tire has not been driven on when flat The damage is only on the tread section of your tire sidewall damage is not repairable and 426 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and additional information Damaged Run Flat tires or Run Flat tires that have experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme di
113. winches or any other City Driving Reduce speed MA aftermarket equipment to the front of your vehicle Air Conditioning This could adversely affect the functioning of the airbag system and you could be injured Turn off temporarily ee STARTING AND OPERATING 471 RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Towing Wheel OFF te Two Wheel Drive Models Four Wheel Drive Models Condition Ground Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED See Instructions e Transmission in PARK e Transfer case in NEUTRAL N e Tow in forward direction Dolly Tow Front NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED ram Rear OK NOT ALLOWED On Trailer ALL OK OK NOTE Vehicles equipped with Quadra Lift placed in Transport Mode tying them down from the tie downs must be fastened to the axles not to the body body on a trailer or flatbed truck Refer to Quadra Failure to follow these instructions may cause fault codes Lift If Equipped in Starting and Operating for to be set and or cause loss of proper tie down tension more information If the vehicle cannot be placed in M must be Transport mode for example engine will not run 472 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Recreational Towing Two Wheel Drive Models DO NOT flat tow this vehicle Damage to the drivetrain will result Recreational towing for two wheel drive models is allowed ONLY if the rear wheels are OFF the ground This may be
114. within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission control system It could also affect fuel economy and drivability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed e If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration 512 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M For states that require an Inspection and Mainte LS nance I M this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD II system is ready for testing Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced recently had a dead battery or a battery replace ment If the OBD I
115. you may need to recline the seat and or raise the head restraint to get a better fit pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path It should not move more than 1 inch 25 4 mm in any direction E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99 How To Stow An Unused ALR Seatbelt When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by other occupants or being used to secure child restraints An unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and accidentally lock the seatbelt retractor Before installing a child restraint using the LATCH system buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of the child s reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation instead of buckling it behind the child restraint route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it Do not lock the seatbelt Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with them WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re straint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the child restraint manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with eith
116. 00 psi 8 274 kPa can result in damage or removal of paint and decals Special Care If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once a month e It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and open ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 543 e e e If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar cause that destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel And Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil and or excessive brake dust use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner CAUTION Do not use scouring pads st
117. 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercar gov or write to Administra tor NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue SE West Building Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other infor mation about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans port Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1 800 333 0510 or go to http www tc gc ca roadsafety 582 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Master card American Express and Discover orders are accepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals no P O Boxes Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor mation that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving main taining servicing and repairing Chrysler Group LLC vehicles A complete working knowledge of the vehicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations diagrams and charts IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are f
118. 11 Windshield Washers pe sica sr eee gcse e 174 Fluid isis epe ERR ERR EE hd ats 525 Windshield Wiper Blades 0 523 Windshield Wipers Jb e ex erus 174 Wiper Blade Replacement llle 523 Wipers Intermittent 00000 175 Wipers Rain Sensitive 2 0 0 0 220 178 INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals Mobile two way radios and telephone equipment must be installed prop erly by trained personnel The following must be observed during installation The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection This connection should not be fused Antennas for two way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when pos sible Use only fully shielded coaxial cable Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio SWR Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may requ
119. 13 Chrysler Group LLC SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 2 10 INTRODUCTION Loser nesan oes bera suat u rbasietka ree gU Read abide EU 3 HN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE sse 11 Il UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE see 115 m UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ien 281 s STARTING AND OPERATING aa DoudatRco paced be were Dau pa bead a odd 345 mm WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 4 ctp sa e ae E RE EE Y TTE EPOR RUE BRI UERIER 479 m MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 4299 53 pp 33 CEA DUCI ERE TTE ESI UR SU RR RU Na 507 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 426g tud pe S PREIS VER te OE man dea doe dn 567 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 56cieckrekibrk RES REX ERE CREER RR ad 575 9 INDEX 585 10 INTRODUCTION CONTENTS B INTRODUCTION 000 4 B WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS 8 M ROLLOVER WARNING eese 5 BI VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER 8 ll HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL 6 B VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS 9 4 INTRODUCTION EE INTRODUCTION Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group LLC vehicle Be assured that it represents precision workmanship distinctive styling and high quality all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles This is a specialized utility vehicle It can go places and perform tasks that conventional
120. 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 N Or Kilometers S 8 8 8 S 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 D x gt 7 gt aw eo e e er co e E SIFTS e SS Sel Se ee ee oe Ey Flush and replace the engine fed coolant at 10 years or X X i28 150 000 miles 240 000 km Iz whichever comes first i Change transfer case fluid X MI Inspect and replace PCV valve X if necessary S m 8 The spark plug change interval is mileage based only yearly intervals do not apply EN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 573 WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic e Failure to properly inspect and maintain your ve hicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance This could cause an accident M A N T E N A N Cc I S e H E D U L E S 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS ll SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech FOR YOUR VEHICLE seen 577 Impaired TDD TTY 000 579 Prepare For The Appointment 577 Service Contract eee 579 Prepare A Dist sse cope RR RR 577 WI WARRANTY INFORMATION 580 B
121. 3 ft 1 0 m of the liftgate press the passive entry lock button located to the right of electronic liftgate handle NOTE The liftgate passive entry lock button will only lock the liftgate the liftgate unlock feature is built into the electronic liftgate handle NOTE If Unlock All Doors 1st Press is programmed in EVIC all doors will unlock when you push the button on the liftgate If Unlock Driver Door 1st press is programmed in Uconnect the liftgate will unlock when you press the button on the liftgate For further informa tion refer to Uconnect in Understanding Your In strument Panel To Lock The Vehicle s Doors With one of the vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmitters within 5 ft 1 5 m of the driver or passenger front door handle press the door handle LOCK button to lock all four doors and liftgate Press The Door Handle Button To Lock 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Do NOT grab the door handle when pressing the door NOTE handle lock button This could unlock the door s e After pressing the door handle LOCK button you must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors using either Passive Entry door handle This is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the door handle without the vehicle reacting and unlocking The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE transmitter battery is dead The vehicle doors can also be locked b
122. 5 Jacking Instructions essare e iaaa E 484 Jack Location 2e nice eee me em x Re Sedes 481 Jack Operation 2 2 a5 iate pu e res 484 Jump Staring ceee esea ga eaea hi dee g a EA 492 Key In Reminder xusan pna aona a eae FRE ea 16 Keyless Enter N Go 000000 eee 36 Keyless Entry System llle 23 Keyless GO essa mesures AU edd nueces 14 Key Programming sean RE RR REO XY Res 19 Key Replacement cioe e e m we ek ad 19 Keys uev ee pae re ed e he wg Ve dea 14 Key Sentry Immobilizer pese iesit anapa 18 Lane Change Assist s ihe oak ce EROR hae 173 Lap Shoulder Belts 0000000004 52 L tch 8 nike eee Gee ER ae as 113 Lead Free Gasoline llli less 442 Leaks Fh d 222a ue RR ELSE LES 113 Lie of Ties e iepe RR RR RR Ree Ys 430 Liftg te is sisse n a Rm rg e 45 Liftgate Window Wiper Washer 277 Light Bulbs gt cec sese m a oie eee anes 113 Lights cce Ginko Soe Ae igs wie se Yuan ee 113 Aithag os ccs ceri nerea teni Ge ad ede 76 AMUALOCK 25 les s REA pev 285 Automatic Headlights 0 165 Back Up gi cete we Gre ays eit RS 559 Brake Assist Warning 205 410 Brake Warning oces dance Rem eom ete 289 Bulb Replacement sse rp ait kaweca ER deis 557 Cargo 24d ei embed RR E NT EHE eis 272 Center Mounted Stop sps te mataia a aca aaa 562 Daytime Running ciem er 3 Ra res 167 Dimmer Switch Headlight iis 163 Electronic Stabilit
123. 8 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated e Wheel Alignment Mode Before performing a wheel alignment this mode must be enabled Refer to your authorized dealer for further information SiriusXM Setup After pressing the SIRIUS Setup soft key the following settings will be available e Channel Skip SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while scanning To make your selection touch the Channel Skip soft key select the channels you would like to skip followed by pressing the arrow back soft key e Subscription Information New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your radio Following the expiration of the free services it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscrip tion Information screen in order to re subscribe Touch the Subscription Info soft key to access the Sub scription Information screen Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver To reactivate your service either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider online NOTE SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription and is available for U S residents only n UNDERSTANDING
124. 91 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Right Rear Quarter Power Outlet Right Rear Quarter Panel Fuse Panel 3 F93 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel 264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING To avoid serious injury or death Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle e If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure CAUTION Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting e Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the bat tery even more quickly Only use these intermit tently and with greater caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle s battery n Xw UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265 POWER INVERTER IF EQUIPPED There is a 115 Volt 150 Watt inverter outlet located on the back of
125. 94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Locating The LATCH Anchorages The lower anchorages are round bars that are found at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback They are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion Locating The LATCH Anchorages The lower anchorages are round bars that are e found at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback below the anchorage sym bols on the seatback They are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint You will easily feel them if you run your finger along gap between the seatback and seat cushion Locating The LATCH Anchorages In addition there are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating position located on the back of the seat To access the top tether strap anchorages behind the rear seat pull the carpeted floor panel away from the seat back this will expose the top tether strap anchorages THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95 Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top Tether Strap Tether Strap 96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se LATCH compatible child restraint systems will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side Each will have a hook or connector to attach t
126. AT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME Jacking Instructions WARNING Continued WARNING Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle Always park on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle e Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised e Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK e Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack Continued jack Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change e If working on or near a roadway be extremely careful of motor traffic e To assure that spare tires flat or inflated are securely stowed spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground TS e lt lt Jack Warning Label CAUTION Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle 1 Remove the spare tire jack and tools from storage 2 Loosen but do not remove the wheel lug nuts by turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is
127. E If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer than 2 seconds then the driver will either have to press the Resume button or apply the throttle to reengage the ACC to the existing Set Speed e ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle in front of your vehicle in close proximity WARNING The Resume function should only be used if traffic and road conditions permit Resuming a set speed Continued WARNING Continued that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate too sharply for safe operation Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury To Vary The Speed Setting While ACC is set you can increase the set speed by pressing the SET button Pressing the SET button once will result in a 1 mph 1 km h increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph 1 km h If the SET button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to increase in 5 mph 10 km h increments until the button is released The increase in set speed is reflected in the EVIC display 196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M While ACC is set the set speed can be decreased by pressing the SET button Pressing the SET button once will result in a 1 mph 1 km h decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrea
128. E 4 The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock If you have difficulties or problems resetting the Active into the back decorative plastic half Head Restraints see an authorized dealer e For safety reasons have the Active Head Restraints checked by a qualified specialist at an authorized dealer 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and front passenger if equipped with front passenger BeltAlert to fasten their seat belts The feature is active whenever the ignition is on If the driver or front seat passenger is unbelted the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are fastened The BeltAlert warning sequence begins after the vehicle speed is over 5 mph 8 km h by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime Once the sequence starts it will continue for the entire duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened After the sequence completes the Seat Belt Reminder Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts are fastened The driver should instruct all other occu pants to fasten their seat belts If a front seat belt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph 8 km h BeltAlert will provide both audio and visual notification The front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the
129. EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location two digits L9 Code representing the tire size two digits ABCD Code used by the tire manufacturer one to four digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd week 416 STARTING AND OPERATING ME EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 Tire Terminology And Definitions Term Definition B Pillar The vehicle B Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after sitting for a three hour period Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI pounds per square inch or kPa kilopascals Maximum Inflation The maximum inflation pressure i
130. Far or set to Near The default status of FCW is the Far setting This means the system will warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther away This gives you the most reaction time To change the setting for more dynamic driving select the Near setting This warns you of a possible collision when you are much closer to the vehicle in front of you This allows for a more dynamic driving experience To change the FCW status touch and release the OFF Near or Far button Then touch the arrow back soft key For further information refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle e Park Assist The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in RE VERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph 318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 18 km h The system can be enabled with Sound Only or Sound and Display To change the Park Assist status touch and release the Sound Only or Sounds and Display button Then touch the arrow back soft key Refer to ParkSense Rear Park Assist in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for system function and operating information e Tilt Mirrors In Reverse When this feature is selected the outside sideview mir rors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the RUN position and the transmission shift lever is in the RE VERSE position The
131. HICLE 229 The six ParkSense sensors located in the front fascia bumper monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is within the sensors field of view The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 in 30 cm up to 47 in 120 cm from the front fascia bumper in the horizontal direction depending on the location type and orienta tion of the obstacle ParkSense amp Warning Display The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if Sound and Display is selected from the Customer Programmable Features section of the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC or from the Uconnect System if equipped Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Program mable Features or Uconnect Settings if equipped in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information The ParkSense amp Warning screen is located within the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC It provides visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia bumper and or front fascia bumper and the de tected obstacle Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Settings in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel for further information 230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE es ParkSense Display The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showin y y e a single arc in the left and or right rear regions based on Th ing displ ill turn ON indicating
132. I system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD II system is ready you must do the following 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine 2 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 3 As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON position you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check 4 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen e The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD II system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 513 you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update A recheck with the above te
133. IC Press and release the RIGHT arrow button and Coolant Temp will be displayed Press the LEFT or RIGHT arrow button to scroll through the infor mation sub menus and press the OK button to select or reset the following resettable sub menus Air Suspension If Equipped Transmission Temperature Automatic Transmission Only Oil Temp Oil Life Battery Voltage 308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Tire Pressure Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until Tire Pressure is highlighted in the EVIC Press and release the RIGHT arrow button and one of the following will be displayed If tire pressure is OK for all tires a vehicle ICON is displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of the ICON If one or more tires have low pressure Inflate Tire To XX is displayed with the vehicle ICON and the tire pressure values in each corner of the ICON with the pressure value of the low tire displayed in a different color than the other tire pressure value If the Tire Pressure system requires service Service Tire Pressure System is displayed Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot be reset Press and release the LEFT arrow button to return to the main menu Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System IPMS under Starting and Operating for further information Trip A Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow ftripA button until the Trip A icon is highlighted in the EVIC Toggle l
134. ILLUMINATED ENTRY IF EQUIPPED 23 WM SENTRY KEY 00 0 00004 18 Mi REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE 23 Replacement Keys 0000005 19 To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate 24 Customer Key Programming 19 To Lock The Doors And Liftgate 25 General Information lille 20 Using The Panic Alarm 26 E VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED 20 O Programming Additional Transmitters 26 Rearming The System 000 20 Transmitter Battery Replacement 26 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME General Information 4 28 MH OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED 28 How To Use Remote Start 29 DOOR LOCKS 00200002 ee 32 Power Door Locks llle 34 Child Protection Door Lock System Rear DOOfS 2o RR RR ns 34 KEYLESS ENTER N GO 0 05 36 WINDOWS prow ti ing cea eae ee ae aaa eee 41 Power Windows iles 41 Wind Buffeting css e Rete 44 EIEIGATE ae ohne RR aoe e roe e CR 45 Power Liftgate If Equipped 46 Lap Shoulder Belts 000 Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Adjustable Upper Shoul
135. ING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Ss To open the glove compartment pull outward on the Door Storage latch and lower the glove box door Large storage areas are built into the door panels for easy access 035209522 Opened Glove Compartment 035209525 Door Panel Storage ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 269 Console Features To open the upper storage compartment pull upward on the small latch located on the lid V Vu A The center console contains both an upper and a lower storage area 035209532 2 Storage Compartment Latches Storage Compartment 270 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Lift upward on the larger of the latches to access the Your vehicle may have an optional CD or DVD player lower storage compartment located in the center console Lower Storage Compartment Lower Storage Compartment CD DVD Player If Equipped ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 271 WARNING Press in on the flashlight to release it Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart ment lid in the open position Cellular phones music players and other handheld electronic devices should be stowed while driving Use of these devices while driving can cause an accident due to distrac tion resulting in death or injury CARGO AREA FEATURES Rechargeable Flashlight The rechargeable flashlight is mounted on the left side of the cargo area The flashlight snaps out of t
136. Interlock Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System Fuel Economy ECO Mode Eight Speed Automatic Transmission ll FOUR WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION Precautions If Equipped Quadra Trac II Operating Precautions If Equipped Quadra Trac I Operating Instructions Instructions 346 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Shift Positions ice eme emm mes 371 W OFF ROAD DRIVING TIPS 386 Shifting Procedures iles 372 Quadra Lift If Equipped 387 Quadra Drive II System If Equipped 375 When To Use 4WD LOW Range lI SELEC TERRAIN IF EQUIPPED 376 If Equipped serseri o re IRR ex 387 Description cies ree 376 Driving Through Water 5 388 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Driving In Snow Mud And Sand 389 Display Messages eee 378 HC GmbINg 25 sepes di dr ERR RHER S 389 ll OUADRA LIFT IF EQUIPPED 378 Traction Downhill c sn shes ok ns 390 Description Be Artal re ae ds a E E EE E Niels d ar od 378 After Driving Off Road sess 391 Air Suspension Modes iile 382 POWER STEERING eee eee 392 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 36L Engine 2255 2bG0k seseeeeriseses 392 Di
137. Jeep 2014 Grand Cherokee OWNER S MANUAL VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada the name Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler Canada Inc used in substitution therefore DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum If you are drinking don t drive Ride with a designated non drinking driver call a cab a friend or use public trans portation Driving after drinking can lead to an accident Your perceptions are less sharp your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking Never drink and then drive This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle Please disregard any features and equipment de scribed in this manual that are not on this vehicle Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products pre viously manufactured Jeep Jeep is a registered trademark of Chrysler Group LLC e Copyright 20
138. Lift for more information If the vehicle cannot be lowered to the Park level for example engine will not run tie downs must be fastened to the axles not to the body Failure to follow these instructions may cause fault codes to be set and or cause loss of proper tie down tension Towing Wheels OFF 2WD Models 4WD Models Condition the Ground Flat Tow NONE If transmission is operable See instructions in Recreational Tow e Transmission in NEUTRAL ing under Starting and Operating e 30 mph 48 km h max speed e Transmission in PARK e 30 miles 48 km max distance Transfer Case in NEUTRAL e Tow in forward direction Wheel Lift or Front NOT ALLOWED Dolly Tow Rear OK NOT ALLOWED Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 503 Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent If the key fob is unavailable or the vehicle s battery is damage to your vehicle Use only tow bars and other discharged refer to Manual Park Release in What to equipment designed for this purpose following equip Do in Emergencies for instructions on shifting the ment manufacturer s instructions Use of safety chains is transmission out of PARK for towing mandatory Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle not to bumpers or associated brackets State and local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be observed Do not use sling type equipment when tow
139. N RUN position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The Vehicle Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle NOTE To avoid unintentional shut downs the system will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle Before the end of the 15 minute cycle press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm System if equipped Then prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle press and release the START STOP button NOTE The message Push Start Button will display in the EVIC until you push the START button e Remote Start Active Push Start Button will dis play in the EVIC until you press the start button Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC for further information 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Remote Start Comfort Systems If Equipped When remote start is activated the heated steering wheel and driver heated seat features will automatically turn on in cold weather In warm weather the driver vented seat feature will automatically turn on when the remote start is activated These features will stay on through the duration of remote start or until the ignition swi
140. NDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME The main display area will normally display the main menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main menu The main display area also displays pop up messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warn ing or information messages These pop up messages fall into several categories e Five Second Stored Messages When the appropriate conditions occur this type of message takes control of the main display area for five seconds and then returns to the previous screen Most of the messages of this type are then stored as long as the condition that activated it remains active and can be reviewed from the Messages main menu item As long as there is a stored message an i will be displayed in the EVIC s compass outside temp line Examples of this message type are Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out and Low Tire Pressure e Unstored Messages This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the condition that activated the message is cleared Examples of this message type are Turn Signal On if a turn signal is left on and Lights On if driver leaves the vehicle e Unstored Messages Until RUN These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start feature This message type is displayed until the ignition is in the RUN state Examples of this message type are Remote Start Aborted Door Ajar and Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to Start e Five Second Unstored Messages
141. OFF button to activate the electronic speed control CRUISE CONTROL READY will appear on the instrument cluster to indicate the electronic speed control is on To turn the system off push the ON OFF button a second time CRUISE CONTROL OFF will appear on the instrument cluster to indicate the electronic speed control is off The system should be turned off when not in use WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it To Set A Desired Speed Turn the Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control ON When the vehicle has reached the desired speed press the SET or SET button and release Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed Once a speed has been set a message CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH KM will appear indicating what speed was set An indicator CRUISE will also appear and stay on in the instrument cluster when the speed is set 186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal pushing the CANCEL button or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed memory Pressing the ON OFF button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed memory To Resume Spe
142. OLLISION WARNING FCW WITH MITIGATION IF EQUIPPED Forward Collision Warning FCW With Mitigation Operation The Forward Collision Warning FCW system with mitigation provides the driver with audible warnings visual warnings within the EVIC and may apply a brake jerk to warn the driver when it detects a potential frontal collision The warnings and limited braking are intended to provide the driver with enough time to react avoid or mitigate the potential collision NOTE FCW monitors the information from the forward looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller EBC to calculate the probability of a forward collision When the system determines that a forward collision is probable the driver will be provided with audible and visual warnings and may provide a brake jerk warning 214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE If the driver does not take action based upon these progressive warnings then the system will provide a limited level of autonomous braking to help slow the vehicle and mitigate the potential forward collision If the driver reacts to the warnings by braking and the system determines that the driver intends to avoid the collision by braking but has not applied sufficient brake force the system will compensate and provide additional brake force as required BRAKE 0323001258 FCW Message When the system determines a collision with the vehicle in front of you is no longer probab
143. ORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Continued e A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap portion pull up a bit on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision WARNING e A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury in a collision The belt forces won t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdo men Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as possible and keep it snug A twisted belt may not protect you properly In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer immedi ately and have it fixed 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck The retrac tor will withdraw any slack in the belt THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 WARNING A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or
144. Once the vehicle is out of the curve the system will resume your original Set Speed This is a part of normal ACC system functionality NOTE On tight turns ACC performance may be limited 032400171 208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Using ACC On Hills When driving on hills ACC may not detect a vehicle in your lane Depending on the speed vehicle load traffic conditions and the steepness of the hills ACC perfor mance may be limited 032400172 Lane Changing ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane in which you are traveling In the illustration shown ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and it may not detect the vehicle until it s too late for the ACC system to take action ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane There may not be sufficient distance to the lane changing vehicle Always be atten tive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209 Narrow Vehicles Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they have moved fully into the lane There may not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead BE 032400173 032400174 210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Stationary Objects And Vehicles ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary vehicles For example ACC will not react in situ
145. RES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205 Removing ACC Sensor For Off Roading NOTE When off roading it may be advisable to remove the ACC sensor The sensor is located behind the front lower grille in the center of the vehicle After removing the lower fascia you may remove the lower sensor and bracket assembly To remove the sensor follow these instructions 1 Unplug the connector by depressing the two tabs on the connector and pulling it out Do not pull by the wiring or use any tools to remove the connector 2 Remove the wiring christmas tree attachment from the back of the bracket 3 Remove the two M6 fasteners that connect the bracket to the bumper NOTE Do not change the adjustment fasteners or pull the sensor off of the bracket Doing so may misalign the sensor Store the sensor and bracket assembly in a safe location The wiring and connector must be stowed properly after the sensor and bracket assembly is removed A connector plug is stowed on top of the bumper beam Insert the wiring connector into the connector plug NOTE When the sensor is removed Adaptive Cruise Control Normal Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning will not be available and the forward collision warning On Off button will stay illuminated Once the vehicles ignition has been cycled the system will re set and resume to full functionality To reinstall the sensor and bracket assembly reverse the process above The fastener torque required to assemb
146. RT STOP button once to return the ignition to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure 300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Messages e e e e e e e e e Front Seatbelts Unbuckled Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled Service Airbag System Traction Control Off Washer Fluid Low Oil Pressure Low Oil Change Due Fuel Low Service Antilock Brake System Service Electronic Throttle Control Service Power Steering Cruise Off Cruise Ready Cruise Set To XXX MPH Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire s Inflate Tire to XX Service Tire Pressure System Parking Brake Engaged Brake Fluid Low Service Electronic Braking System Engine Temperature Hot Battery Voltage Low Service Electronic Throttle Control Lights On ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301 e Right Turn Signal Light Out Remote Start Aborted Time Expired Left Turn Signal Light Out Remote Start Disabled Start to Reset e Turn Signal On e Service Airbag System Vehicle Not in Park e e Service Airbag Warning Light Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled Front Seatbelts Unbuckled Key in Ignition Key in Ignition Lights On e e Remote Start Active Key to Run e Remote Start A
147. SC This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions ESC cor rects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in ee STARTING AND OPERATING 401 counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path ESC applies the brake of the appro priate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when the TCS is active If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during accel eration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions WARNING The Electronic Stability Control ESC cannot pre
148. STANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions the active braking may not be fully available Once the condition that limited the system performance is no longer present the system will return to its full performance state If the problem persists see your authorized dealer Service FCW Warning If the system turns off and the EVIC displays e ACC FCW Unavailable Service Required Cruise FCW Unavailable Service Required This indicates there is an internal system fault Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions have the system checked by an authorized dealer PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST IF EQUIPPED The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up e g during a parking maneuver Refer to ParkSense System Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and recommendations ParkSense will retain the last system state enabled or disabled from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON RUN position ParkSense can be active only when the shift lever is in REVERSE If ParkSense is enabled at this shift lever position the system will remain active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph 11 km h or ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219 above The system will become active aga
149. Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load ing either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure INDEX 506 INDEX BEEN Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Cruise Control 188 Adding Engine Coolant Antifreeze 531 Adding Fuel 2 ass e DR Remb 450 Additives Fuel llle 445 AIIDagesscsuecuerxued Saee cse e Eg coe 68 Airbag Deployment 0000000000 79 Airbag Light se eesi ais tocia pme Te rh Re Tes 76 Airbag Maintenance llle 81 Airbag Side ese ate ae PGs AA ER IAE 71 Airbag Window Side Curtain 72 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 518 Air Conditioner Maintenance sss 520 Air Conditioning Filter llle 342 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 343 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 520 Air Conditioning System 0 000 339 Air Pressure Tires 0 0 0 0 cee ee 423 Air SUSPENSION e sea esed xu Re ses em saatei 378 Alarm Pane sie does eR eR RR Ren E don 26 Alarm Security Alar ss ee as aia i a ae a a 20 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 9 Antifreeze Engine Coolant
150. Side Air Bags SAB may provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant during a side impact The SAB is marked with an air bag label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats e No objects should be placed over or near the air bag on the instrument panel because any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate e Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers or attempt to open them manually You may damage the air bags and you could be injured because the air bags may no longer be functional The protective covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the air bags are inflating Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee bolster in any way Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as alarm lights stereos citizen band radios etc A 102261 0242 Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bag Label 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE When the air bag deploys it opens the seam between the front and side of the seat s trim cover Each air bag deploys independently a left side impact deploys the left air bag only and a right side impact deploys the right air bag only Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC SABIC air bags may offer side impact and vehicle roll over protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that provided by the body structure Each air bag features
151. Sway Control TSC Hill Start Assist HSA Brake Lock Differential BLD Ready Alert Braking Rain Brake Support and if it has four wheel drive with the MP 3023 two speed transfer case Hill Descent Control HDC Selec Speed Control SSC Anti Lock Brake System ABS This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions The system controls hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock up and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking Refer to Anti Lock Brake System in Starting and Operating for further information WARNING The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions The ABS cannot prevent collisions including those result ing from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Traction Control System TCS This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability ee STARTING AND OPERATING 399 A feature of the TCS system Brake Limited Differential BLD functions similar to a li
152. TAL WEIGHT 540 ibs 540 Ibs Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 200 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 ibs 400 Ibs STARTING AND OPERATING 421 AVAILABLE Cargo Luggage and Trailer Tongue Weight 195 Ibs 325 Ibs 465 Ibs B11a4d11 422 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Safety WARNING Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions Under inflation increases tire flexing and can re sult in over heating and tire failure increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION y imn M shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can Tire Pressure cause damage that result in tire failure Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect ve hicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob lems You could lose control of your vehicle Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 423 WARNING Continued Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right
153. TARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 Flash Lights With Remote Key This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit ter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation Turn Headlights On With Remote Key Unlock This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped through Uconnect To change the current setting refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information To Lock The Doors And Liftgate Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter to lock all doors and liftgate The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry refer to Keyless Enter N Go under Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
154. TCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 Ibs 29 5 kg Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once the combined weight is more than 65 Ibs 29 5 kg Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used together to attach a rear facing or forward facing child restraint Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear facing or forward facing child restraint Can a child seat be installed in the center position using the inner LATCH lower anchorages Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a child seat in the center seating position en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93 Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower LATCH anchorage No Never share a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints If the center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position Can the rear facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat Yes The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact See your child restraint owner s manual for more information Can the head restraints be removed Yes center position only
155. TION Continued e Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack Wind forces due to natural causes or nearby truck traffic can add sudden upward lift to a load This is especially true on large flat loads and may result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle WARNING Cargo must be securely tied before driving your vehicle Improperly secured loads can fly off the vehicle particularly at high speeds resulting in per sonal injury or property damage Follow the roof rack cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS BB INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 283 EVIC Red Telltales llle 304 B INSTRUMENT CLUSTER lessen 284 EVIC Green Telltales llle E INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 285 EVIC Selectable Menu Items B ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items 311 CENTER NIC enrera dique heated e es a Bl Uconnect ACCESS SETTINGS 312 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC DisplayS 22 4 Rer oe RR 295 Hard Keys eese 313 Engine Oil Change Indicator System OPERIS 299 Soft Keys qoM DUE EE 314 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC E Uconnect RADIOS IF EQUIPPED 329 Messages cse ee eee 300 Wi iPod USB MP3 CONTROL IF EQUIPPED 329 EVIC
156. UTION e ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle including small obstacles Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity The vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected It is recommended that the driver looks over his her shoulder when using ParkSense ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227 WARNING Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using ParkSense Always check carefully behind your vehicle look behind you and be sure to check for pedestrians animals other vehicles obstructions and blind spots before backing up You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death Continued WARNING Continued Before using ParkSense it is strongly recom mended that the ball mount and hitch ball assem bly is disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the continuous tone Also the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assem bly depending on
157. When shifting into PARK press the lock button on the shift lever and push the lever all the way forward until it stops When released the lever will return to its home position e With brake pedal released look at the transmission gear position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position REVERSE This range is for moving the vehicle backward Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop NEUTRAL Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running The engine may be started in this range Apply the parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle WARNING Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision ee STARTING AND OPERATING 365 CAUTION Towing the vehicle coasting or driving for any other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission damage Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting And Operating and Towing A Disabled Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information DRIVE This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest upshifts and down shifts and the best fuel economy The transmission automatically upshifts throu
158. When the appropriate conditions occur this type of mes sage takes control of the main display area for five seconds and then returns to the previous screen An example of this message type is Automatic High Beams On ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299 Engine Oil Change Indicator System Oil Change Required Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Oil Change Required message will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 sec onds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position or cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position if equipped with Keyless Enter N Go To turn off the message temporarily press and release the MENU but ton To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance refer to the following procedure Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter N Go 1 Without pressing the brake pedal press the ENGINE START STOP button and cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Without pressing the brake pedal press the ENGINE STA
159. X Ibs or XXX kg cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1 400 Ibs 635 kg and there will be five 150 Ib 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs 295 kg since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 Ibs 295 kg Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle 420 STARTING AND OPERATING ME NOTE The following table shows examples on how to calcu late total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle e For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs 392 kg TOTAL FRONT REAR EXAMPLE 1 Combined weight of occupants and cargo from Tire Placard 865 Ibs 865 Ibs MINUS minus minus Combined Occupant s weight Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 1 210 Ibs Occupant 2 180 Ibs Occupant 3 150 tbs TO
160. a normal condition and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles kilometers Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting between these gears STARTING AND OPERATING 361 The transmission shift lever provides PARK REVERSE NEUTRAL DRIVE and SPORT shift positions Once in the DRIVE range tapping the shift lever rearward will toggle between SPORT mode and DRIVE mode You do not need to press the shift lever button when toggling between DRIVE and SPORT modes Manual shifts can be made using the shift paddles mounted on the steering wheel Pressing the shift paddles while in the DRIVE or SPORT position will manually select the trans mission gear and will display the current gear in the instrument cluster Refer to Paddle Shift Mode in this section for further information 3057574392 Shift Lever Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range 362 STARTING AND OPERATING EE NOTE After selecting any gear range wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating This is especially important when the engine is cold PARK This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brak
161. a trailer Trailer Sway Control The trailer sway control can be a mechanical telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable fric tion associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling If equipped the electronic Trailer Sway Control TSC recognizes a swaying trailer and automatically applies individual wheel brakes and or reduces engine power to attempt to eliminate the trailer sway Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle These kinds of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers 458 STARTING AND OPERATING EMm Weight Distributing Hitch WARNING A weight distributing system works by applying lever age through spring load bars They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle s front axle and the trailer axle s When used in accordance with the manufacturers directions it provides for a more level ride offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety The addition of a friction hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trail
162. acation Storage Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service ie vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again 342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Window Fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost The Defrost Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heating If side win dow fogging becomes a problem increase blower speed Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather NOTE Recirculate without A C should not be used for long periods as fogging may occur e Automatic Temperature Controls ATC will automati cally adjust the climate control settings to reduce or eliminate window fogging on the front windshield When this occurs recirculation will be unavailable Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of obstructions such as leaves Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow and if they enter the plenum they could plug the water drains In Winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice slush and snow A C Air Filter The climate control system filters outside air contain
163. accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle trailer If using a tow dolly follow this procedure 1 Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle following the dolly manufacturer s instructions 2 Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly 3 Firmly apply the parking brake Shift the transmission into PARK 4 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position 5 Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly following the dolly manufacturer s instructions 6 Install a suitable clamping device designed for tow ing to secure the front wheels in the straight position CAUTION Towing with the rear wheels on the ground will cause severe transmission damage Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Recreational Towing Quadra Trac II Quadra DriveG Il Four Wheel Drive Models The transfer case must be shifted into NEUTRAL N and the transmission must be in PARK for recreational tow ing The NEUTRAL N selection button is adjacent to the transfer case selector switch Shifts into and out of transfer case NEUTRAL N can take place with the selector switch in any mode position ee STARTING AND OPERATING 473 CAUTION Continued CAUTION DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle Internal dam age to the transmission or transfer case will occur if a dolly is used when recreational towing Tow only in a forward direction Towing this ve hicle backwards can cause severe damage
164. adar sensors are located must remain free of snow ice and dirt road contamination so that the BSM system can function properly Do not block the area of the rear fascia where the radar sensors are located with foreign objects bum per stickers bicycle racks etc 030409806 Sensor Location Driver Side Shown The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an audible chime alert and reducing the radio volume Refer to Modes Of Operation for further information UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 Warning Light Location The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three different entry points side rear front while driving to see if an alert is necessary The BSM system will issue an alert during these types of zone entries 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Entering From The Side Entering From The Rear Vehicles Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either that come up from behind your vehicle on either side of the vehicle side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative speed of less than 30 mph 48 km h 1 Side Monitoring Rear Monitoring ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 Overtaking Traffic If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed less than 15 mph 24 km h and the vehicle remains in the blind spot
165. adding a sunroof to your vehicle Do not add roof racks that require perma nent attachments bolts or screws for installation on the vehicle roof Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Always sit upright as possible with your back against the seat back use the seat belts properly and use the appropriate sized child restraint infant restraint or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child SAB and SABIC air bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint system Occupants including children who are up against or very close to SAB or SABIC air bags can be seriously injured or killed Occupants especially chil dren should not lean on or sleep against the door side windows or area where the SAB or SABIC air bags inflate even if they are in an infant or child restraint Knee Impact Bolsters The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and the front passenger and position front occu pants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front Air Bag Along with seat belts and pretensioners Advanced Front Air Bags work with the knee bolsters to provide im proved protection for the driver and front passenger Side air bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag provides enhanced protection and works together with the Driver Adv
166. adlights On Automatically With Wipers If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic Headlights it also has this customer programmable feature When your headlights are in the automatic mode and the engine is running they will automatically turn on when the wiper system is on The programmable settings are available in the in the Uconnect system screen Refer to Customer Programmable Features Uconnect amp Access 8 4 Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information If your vehicle is equipped with a Rain Sensitive Wiper System and it is activated the headlights will automati cally turn on after the wipers complete five wipe cycles within approximately one minute and they will turn off approximately four minutes after the wipers completely stop Refer to Windshield Wipers And Washers in this section for further information NOTE When your headlights come on during the day time the instrument panel lights will automatically dim to the lower nighttime intensity Refer to Lights in this section for further information 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Automatic High Beam If Equipped and other obstructions sticker toll box etc on the windshield or camera lens will cause the system to The automatic high beam system provides increased b function improperly forward lighting at night by automating high beam control through the use of a digital camera mounted on To Act
167. ages NEUTRAL This range disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain It is to be used for flat towing behind another vehicle Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting and Operating for further information 4WD LOW This range is for low speed four wheel drive It locks the front and rear driveshafts together and forces the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed It provides additional traction and maximum pulling power for loose slippery road surfaces only Do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h NOTE Refer to Selec Terrain If Equipped for further information on the various positions and their intended usages 372 STARTING AND OPERATING Shifting Procedures 4WD HI To 4WD LOW With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph 0 to 5 km h the ignition switch in the ON position or the engine running shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and press the AWD LOW button once on the transfer case switch The AWD LOW indicator light in the instrument cluster will begin to flash and remain on solid when the shift is complete Transfer Case Switch 0582003299 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 373 NOTE If shift conditions interlocks are not met or a NOTE transfer case motor temperature protection condition exists a For 4x4 Low Slow Below 3 MPH or 5 KPH Put Trans in N Press 4 Low message will flash from the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electro
168. ake 3 Start the engine 4 Press and hold the brake pedal 5 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL STARTING AND OPERATING 477 6 Using a ballpoint pen or similar object press and hold 8 After the NEUTRAL N button has been released the the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL N button lo cated by the selector switch for one second 0582003302 NEUTRAL N Switch 7 When the NEUTRAL N indicator light turns off release the NEUTRAL N button 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 transfer case will shift to the position indicated by the selector switch Shift the transmission into PARK Turn the engine OFF Release the brake pedal Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle Start the engine Press and hold the brake pedal Release the parking brake Shift the transmission into DRIVE release the brake pedal and check that the vehicle operates normally 478 STARTING AND OPERATING EE NOTE e Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met prior to pressing the NEUTRAL N button and must continue to be met until the shift has been completed If any of these requirements are not met prior to pressing the NEUTRAL N button or are no longer met during the shift the NEUTRAL N indicator light will flash continuously until all requirements are met or until the NEUTRAL N button is released The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN position for a shift to take place and for the position indicator
169. ake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 397 WARNING Continued CAUTION Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the in a location accessible to children and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN position A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM before driving failure to do so can lead to brake Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic failure and a collision brake control system that includes the Anti Lock Brake e Always fully apply the parking brake when leav System ABS Traction Control System TCS Brake ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or Assist System BAS Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM injury Also be certain to leave the transmission in and Electronic Stability Control ESC All five of these PARK Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll Systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and and cause damage or injury control in various driving conditions parking brake released a brake system malfunction is indicated Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately 398 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Also your vehicle is equipped with Trailer
170. al the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation 22 Park Headlight ON Indicator If Equipped This indicator will illuminate when the park DF lights or headlights are turned on ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster ao ooooo h STORED MESSAGES 3 12567 mi A a 040973365 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Location UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295 This system allows the driver to select a variety of useful information by pressing the switches mounted on the steering wheel The EVIC consists of the following Digital Speedometer e Vehicle Info e Fuel Economy Info e Trip A e Trip B e Radio Info e Stored Messages e Screen Setup 296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The system allows the driver to select information by e UP Arrow Button pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering Press and release the UP arrow button to scroll wheel A upward through the main menu and sub menus Main Gauge MPH km h Vehicle Info Terrain Driver Assist Fuel Economy Trip A Trip B Audio Stored Messages Screen Set Up e DOWN Arrow Button Press and release the DOWN arrow button to V scroll downward through the main menu and submenus Main Gauge MPH km h Vehicle Info Te
171. aler for service 382 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Air Suspension Modes The Air Suspension system has multiple modes to protect the system in unique situations Tire Jack Mode To assist with changing a spare tire the air suspension system has a feature which allows the automatic leveling to be disabled Refer to Uconnect Access Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information NOTE This mode is intended to be used with engine running Transport Mode To assist with flat bed towing the air suspension system has a feature which will put the vehicle into Entry Exit height and disable the automatic load leveling system Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Wheel Alignment Mode Before performing a wheel alignment this mode must be enabled Refer to Uconnect Access Settings in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information NOTE This mode is intended to be used with engine running If equipped with a touch screen radio all enabling disabling of air suspension features must be done through the radio Refer to Uconnect Access Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information ee STARTING AND OPERATING 383 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display Messages When the appropriate conditions exist a message will appear in the EVIC display
172. alet parking To remove the emergency key slide the mechanical latch on the back of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand 0202003287 Mechanical Latch On The Back Of The Key Fob 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME 020241333 Emergency Key Removal NOTE You can insert the double sided emergency key into the lock cylinders with either side up Ignition Or Accessory On Message Opening the driver s door when the ignition is in ACC or ON engine not running a chime will sound to remind you to cycle the ignition to OFF In addition to the chime the ignition or accessory on message will display in the cluster NOTE With the Uconnect system the power window switches radio power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable Refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 WARNING Continued WARNING e When leaving the vehicle always remove the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others
173. amination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol Continued MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 559 CAUTION Continued Rear Tail Stop and Turn Signal Lamps e Always use the correct bulb size and type for 1 Raise the liftgate replacement An incorrect bulb size or type may 2 Remove the two push pins from the tail lamp housing overheat and cause damage to the lamp the socket or the lamp wiring 3 Grasp the tail lamp and pull firmly rearward to disengage the lamp from the aperture panel 4 Align the index tabs of the front fog lamp bulb with the slots in the collar of the bulb opening on the back of the front fog lamp housing 5 Insertthe bulb into the housing until the index tabs are engaged in the slots of the collar 6 Firmly and evenly push the bulb straight into the lamp housing until both tabs snap firmly into place and are fully engaged N Connect the wiring harness to the front fog lamp connector 073374396 560 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 4 Twist socket counter clockwise and remove from lamp 5 Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket 6 Replace the bulb reinstall the socket and reattach the lamp assembly Rear Liftgate Mounted Tail Lamp 1 Raise the liftgate 2 Use a fiber stick or flat blade screw driver to pry the lower trim from the liftgate 3 Continue removing the trim 4 Disconnec
174. an burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your ve hicle in areas where your exhaust system can con tact anything that can burn The catalytic converter requires the use of un leaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine perfor mance and cause serious damage to the engine Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance have your vehicle serviced promptly Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle 528 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs stop the vehicle turn off the engine and allow it to c
175. anced Front Air Bag during a frontal impact Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls Occupant Restraint Controller ORC The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system required for this vehicle The ORC determines if deployment of the front and or side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required Based on the impact sensor s signals a central electronic E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags Supplemen tal Driver Side Knee Air Bag SABIC air bags SAB air bags and front seat belt pretensioners as required depending on several factors including the severity and type of impact Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag are designed to provide additional protec tion by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal collisions depending on several factors including the severity and type of collision Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear side or rollover collisions The Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag will not deploy in all frontal collisions including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage for example some pole collisions truck under rides and angle offset collisions On the other hand depending on the type and location of impact Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag may de
176. and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire 428 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any given time WARNING Compact spares are for temporary emergency use only With these spares do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spares have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control Full Size Spare If Equipped The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not This spare tire may have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be replaced Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire replace or repair the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity Limited Use Spare If Equipped The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only This tire is identified by a label located on the limited use spare
177. anding Your Instrument Panel for further information If PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS or PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SEN SORS appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC make sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia bumper and or front fascia bumper is clean and clear of snow ice mud dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition If the message continues to appear see an authorized dealer If the PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE RE QUIRED message appears in the EVIC see an autho rized dealer Cleaning The ParkSense amp System Clean the ParkSense sensors with water car wash soap and a soft cloth Do not use rough or hard cloths Do not scratch or poke the sensors Otherwise you could dam age the sensors 236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE SS ParkSense amp System Usage Precautions NOTE e Ensure that the front and rear bumper are free of snow ice mud dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operating properly Jackhammers large trucks and other vibrations could affect the performance of ParkSense When you turn ParkSense off the instrument cluster will display PARKSENSE OFF Furthermore once you turn ParkSense off it remains off until you turn it on again even if you cycle the ignition key When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE position and ParkSense is turned off the instrument cluster will display
178. ar hook will be located on the driver s side of the vehicle NOTE For off road recovery it is recommended to use both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of damage to the vehicle WARNING Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle Chains may break causing serious injury or death e Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow hooks Tow straps may become disengaged caus ing serious injury CAUTION Tow hooks are for emergency use only to rescue a vehicle stranded off road Do not use tow hooks for tow truck hookup or highway towing You could damage your vehicle EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 499 MANUAL PARK RELEASE 8 SPEED Follow these steps to use the Manual Park Release TRANSMISSION 1 Open the center console and locate the Manual Park WARNING Release cover remove it by snapping the cover away from the console hinges Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the parking brake before activating the Manual Park Release Activating the Manual Park Release will allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by the parking brake or by proper connection to a tow vehicle Activating the Manual Park Release on an unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury or death for those in or around the vehicle In order to push or tow the vehicle in cases where the transmission will not shift out of PARK such as a dead j battery a Manual Park Release is available 20605001153 Man
179. ars old or younger and who have not reached the height or weight limits of their child restraint Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint facing rearward in the rear seat of the vehicle Small Children Children who are at least two years old or who have out grown the height or weight limit of their rear facing child restraint Forward Facing Child Restraint with a five point Harness facing forward in the rear seat of the vehicle Larger Children Children who have out grown their forward facing child restraint but are too small to properly fit the vehicle s seat belt Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt seated in the rear seat of the vehicle Children Too Large for Child Restraints Children 12 years old or younger who have out grown the height or weight limit of their booster seat Vehicle Seat Belt seated in the rear seat of the vehicle 86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Infants And Child Restraints Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear facing child safety seat Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or heig
180. as are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward Push the seat switch forward or rearward the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position has been reached B Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down Pull upward or push downward on the seat switch the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the 0309090538 SWitch when the desired position has been reached Power Seat Switches Tilting The Seat Up Or Down 1 Seatback Switch The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or 2 Seat Switch down Pull upward or push downward on the front of the seat switch the front of the seat cushion will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position has been reached 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Reclining The Seatback WARNING Continued The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the rearward Push the seatback switch forward or rearward shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release In a collision you could slide under the s
181. as soon as possible WARNING Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking You might not have full braking power when you need it to prevent a collision If you have been operating your vehicle in dirty conditions get your brakes checked and cleaned as necessary If you experience unusual vibration after driving in mud slush or similar conditions check the wheels for impacted material Impacted material can cause a wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will correct the situation 392 STARTING AND OPERATING POWER STEERING 3 6L Engine Your vehicle is equipped with an electro hydraulic power steering system that will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will vary its assist to provide light efforts while parking and good feel while driving If the electro hydraulic power steering system experiences a fault that prevents it from providing power steering assist then the system will provide mechanical steering capability CAUTION Extreme steering maneuvers may cause the electri cally driven pump to reduce or stop power steering assistance in order to prevent damage to the system Normal operation will resume once the system is allowed to cool If the SERVICE POWER STEERING SYSTEM el message and a flashing icon are displayed on the EVIC screen it indicates that the vehicle needs to be ta
182. as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended cold tire placard pressure Once the low tire pressure warning has been illuminated the tire pressure must be increased to the recommended cold tire pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to be turned off The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extin guish once the updated tire pressures have been received ee STARTING AND OPERATING 437 The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h to receive this information For example your vehicle has a recommended cold parked for more than three hours tire placard pressure of 33 psi 227 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi 193 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 24 psi 165 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi 193 kPa but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still be ON In this situation the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires have been inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold tire pressure value CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and whe
183. at can be lowered to allow for extended cargo space and still maintain some rear seating room Rear Seat Release UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 NOTE To Raise Rear Seat Do not fold the 60 rear seat down with the left Raise the rear seatback and lock it into place If interfer outboard or rear center seat belt buckled ence from the cargo area prevents the seatback from fully Do not fold the 40 rear seat down with the right locking you will have difficulty returning the seat to its outboard seat belt buckled proper position WARNING Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position If the seatback is not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stabil ity for child seats and or passengers An improp erly latched seat could cause serious injury e The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle with the rear seatbacks in the locked up or folded down position should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle is in motion They could be seriously injured in a collision Children should be seated and using the proper restraint system 030909671 Rear Seat Folded 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Reclining Rear Seat To recline the seatback lift the lever located on the outboard side of the seat lean back and release the lever at the desired position To return the seatback lift the lever lean forward and release the lever j
184. at overnight Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level in the SAFE level range Adding 1 U S Quart 0 95L of oil when the level is at the bottom of the SAFE range will result in the level being at the top of the SAFE range CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine Change Engine Oil The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for further informa tion NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change inter vals exceed 10 000 miles 16 000 km or twelve months whichever occurs first Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 516 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty En
185. ate the system is turned ON Turning ParkView On Or Off With Uconnect 8 4 8 4A 1 Press the Controls soft key located on the bottom of the Uconnect display 2 Press the Settings soft key 3 Press the Safety amp Driving Assistance soft key 4 Press the Parkview Backup camera soft key to turn the ParkView system ON or OFF NOTE A check mark will appear in the selection box to indicate the system is turned ON OVERHEAD CONSOLE The overhead console contains courtesy reading lights and storage for sunglasses Universal Garage Door Opener HomeLink power liftgate and power sunroof switches may also be included if equipped Overhead Console 033333450 242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Front Map Reading Lights To turn the lights off press the switch a second time The lights also turn on when a door is opened The lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE is pressed Lights are mounted in the overhead console Each light can be turned on by pressing the switch on either side of the console These buttons are backlit for night time visibility 031433150 Front Map Reading Lights UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243 Courtesy Lights Sunglasses Bin Door The courtesy lights can be turned on by pressing the top At the front of the console a compartment is provided for corner of the lens To turn the lights off press thelensa the storage of a
186. ately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service description Load Index and Speed Code All Season Tires If Equipped All Season tires provide traction for all seasons spring summer fall and winter Traction levels may vary be tween different all season tires All season tires can be identified by the M S M amp S M S or MS designation on the tire sidewall Use all season tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Summer Or Three Season Tires If Equipped Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry conditions and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice Summer tires will not contain the all season designation or mountain snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall Use summer tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Snow Tires Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the winter Snow tires can be identified by a mountain snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall If you need snow tires select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires Use snow tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph 120 km h For speed
187. ather condi tions into account and may be limited upon adverse sight distance conditions Does not always fully recognize complex driving conditions which can result in wrong or missing distance warnings e Can only apply a maximum of 40 of the vehi cle s braking capability and will not bring the vehicle to a complete stop WARNING You should switch off the ACC system When driving in fog heavy rain heavy snow sleet heavy traffic and complex driving situations i e in highway construction zones When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp when driving on roads that are winding icy snow covered slippery or have steep uphill or downhill slopes e When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes e When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a constant speed Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury 190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The Cruise Control system has two control modes e Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an appropriate distance between vehicles e Normal fixed speed cruise control mode for cruising at a constant preset speed For additional information refer to Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control Mode in this section NOTE Normal fixed speed cruise control will not react to preceding vehicles Always be aware of the mode selected You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control buttons
188. ation for Jacking llle 483 a INDEX 597 Pretensioners Seat Belts sag Spe Rr SERRE ba s 61 Programming Transmitters Remote Keyless Entry 23 Quadra Lift 2e ce E REESE as 378 Quadra Tra Cres nc ster E ER Ete 369 Radial Ply Ties 03 sub ova be OPER SS EE 425 Radiator Cap Coolant Pressure Cap 532 Radio Operation 2 6 llle 331 Radio Remote Controls 0 2004 329 Rain Sensitive Wiper System 178 Rear Axle Differential sells 537 Rear Camera ll eee 238 Rear Cross Path scs see e bt ese 135 Rear Cuphold t kie RR ER RSS Sa 266 Rear Park Sense System erates acoitar eee 218 Rear Seat Folding 44 i dx eh uo ex ee ey ws 154 Rear Window Features llle ss 277 Rear Wiper Washer 0 0 0 00000000000 277 Reclining Front 5eats llle 144 Recorder Event Data 2 0 0 0 cee eae 82 Recreational Towing naau naa 00 ee eee 471 Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral N 473 Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral N 476 Reformulated Gasoline llle 443 Retriger nt csse hrsg dr eee ons 521 Reminder Seat Belt leen 66 Remote Control Starting System rse draet audra eee 28 Remote Keyless Entry RKE onanan aaan 23 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 329 Remote Starting System llle Replacement Bulbs sec sneis okena s me 00000005 Replacement Keys llle Replacem
189. ations where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary 032400175 x General Information FCC Requirements For Vehicular Radar Systems Classification Specifications 47 C ER Part 15 47 C F R Part 15 515 Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control Mode In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode a Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode is available for cruis ing at fixed speeds The Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode is designed to maintain a set cruising speed without requiring the driver to operate the accel erator Cruise Control can only be operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph 30 km h es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211 To change between the different cruise control modes press the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL ACC ON OFF button which turns the ACC and the NORMAL Fixed Speed CONTROL OFF Pressing of the NORMAL Fixed Speed CRUISE CONTROL ON OFF button will result in turning ON changing to the Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode WARNING In the Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode the system will not react to vehicles ahead Be sure to maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead Always be aware which mode is selected Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury To Set A D
190. back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Lights After pressing the Lights soft key the following settings will be available e Headlight Illumination On Approach When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter To change the Illuminated Approach status touch the or soft key to select your desired time interval Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Headlights With Wipers If Equipped When this feature is selected and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on ap proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature To make your selection touch the Headlights With Wipers softkey until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Auto Dim High Beams SmartBeam If Equipped When this feature is selected the high beam headlights will deactivate automatically under certain conditions To make your selection touch the Auto High Beams softkey until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321 to return to the
191. be opened with the cargo cover in place Rear Cargo Cover ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 275 WARNING In a collision a loose cargo cover in the vehicle could cause injury It could fly around in a sudden stop and strike someone in the vehicle Do not store the cargo cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compart ment Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken from its mounting Do not store it in the vehicle Rear Cargo Tie Downs The rear cargo tie downs located on the cargo area floor should be used to safely secure loads when the vehicle is Rear Cargo Tie Downs moving 276 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING e To help protect against personal injury passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only not for passengers who should sit in seats and use seat belts Cargo tie down hooks are not safe anchors for a child seat tether strap In a sudden stop or accident a hook could pull loose and allow the child seat to come loose A child could be badly injured Use only the anchors provided for child seat tethers The weight and position of cargo and passengers can change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle handling To avoid loss of control resulting in per sonal injury follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle Continued WARNING Continued Do not carry loads whi
192. brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic brake controller is not required Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 Ibs 454 kg and required for trailers in excess of 1 653 Ibs 750 kg CAUTION If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 lbs 454 kg loaded it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances WARNING Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s hydraulic brake lines It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail You might not have brakes when you need them and could have an accident Continued STARTING AND OPERATING 467 The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle BENING O but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector e Towing any trailer will increase your stopping Refer to the following illustrations distance When towing you should allow for addi tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in an accident S O Towing Requirements Trailer
193. cages Behe needle 361 General Information 0004 20 Glass Cleaning 599 dd ers ina ee E i 545 Gross Axle Weight Rating 456 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 455 GVWR 5 seu se ee ater eae ue es es 453 Hazard Warning Flasher 04 480 Headlights s 2s sek Roe RES LEM EE RES 557 Bulb Replacement 00 0005 557 Clearing 4 ockaduesoced c baie e oe es 545 On With Wipers Passing 5s v yeah d e x edem ace vC ee is 174 Replacing ik Ead doppi e Pas EUR era 557 Heated MitIOIS iei hber REPE ek GS 127 Heater Engine Block llle 356 High Beam Indicator sss va ye Re ES 286 Hill Descent Control ase ehm d 406 Hill Start Assist 404 Hitches Trailer TOWING re ag Bare mer care ead 460 HomeLink Garage Door Opener 244 Hood Release sidead pipan asat aa en edi h une 162 Ignition Key x eati eduR aia tia oe i a tidie de E aes 14 Illuminated Entry 2 2 0 eee 23 Immobilizer Sentry Key 000 4 18 Infant Restraint cce eme xxm Ren mna 83 Inside Rearview MITOP ces ciee e esaa ihm 123 Instrument Cluster i c gisa ee dp aide oes 285 en INDEX 593 Instrument Panel and Controls 283 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 546 Interior Appearance Care llle 544 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 175 Introductiohi esc atr DER Y b Peake ees 4 Inverter Power llle 26
194. cesset kenn vr ER ER 289 Brake Transmission Interlock 0 359 Bulb Replacement 00000000000 555 Bulbs Light ce RR RRRTD Red 113 Camera Rear uen Rye vane RU PRAE 238 Capacities Fluid sacre Rn Rea Pes 563 Caps Filler Oil Engine vem e rra er redis 516 Power Steering oie cage med EX eR dues 394 Radiator Coolant Pressure 532 Carbon Monoxide Warning 110 Cargo Area Cover llle 274 Cargo Area Features sona aaie les 271 Cargo Compartment 0 0 0 0 0 cee eee 271 Eight es ebesees ce EE GR REIR ES 272 Cargo Light idees Lea eR eee 272 Cargo Tie DoWnS 4i aces eee acs ace eae ns 275 Car Washes 0 0 0 ee eee ee eee 542 Cellular Phone lesse m I 331 508 INDEX eee Center High Mounted Stop Light 562 Certification Label 2 0 0 0 0 0 00 ee eee 453 Chains DIe 25 Dex 0029 UR KP APP aed 433 Chart Tire SIZING cs con EROR EROR eS 413 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light 511 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety Ls 109 Checks Safety d REPRE Re EE IS 109 Child R straint ee esa oss ok x a 83 Child Safety Locks ena daara EENE 34 Clean Air Gasoline 00 0 eee eee 443 Cleaning Wheels so cerea soe Ek k b Re EE 543 Climate Control gue wea dan E as 332 Cold Weather Operation llle 354 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 331 Compact Spare Tire 0 0 cc ee
195. ch exceed the load limits described on the label attached to the left door or left door center pillar Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor Put heavier objects as low and as far forward as pos sible e Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear axle Too much weight or improperly placed weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the vehicle to sway Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the seatback This could impair visibility or be come a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or accident UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 277 REAR WINDOW FEATURES NJ Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to Rear Window Wiper Washer the first detent for intermittent operation and to the second detent for continuous rear wiper operation The rear wiper washer controls are located on the mul per op tifunction lever on the left side of the steering column Rotating the center portion upward once more The rear wiper washer is operated by rotating a switch will activate the washer pump which will con located at the middle of the lever tinue to operate as long as the switch is held Upon release of the switch the wipers will resume the continu ous rear wiper operation When this rotary control is in the OFF position rotating it downward will activate the rear washer pump which will continue to operate as long as the switch is held Once the switch is released it will return
196. ched Tilting The Seat Up Or Down The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or down Pull upward or push downward on the front of the seat switch the front of the seat cushion will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when you have reached the desired position 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Power Lumbar If Equipped Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats may also be equipped with power lumbar The power lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat Push the switch forward to increase the lumbar support Push the switch rearward to decrease the lumbar support Pushing upward or downward on the switch will raise and lower the position of the support K 00 Power Lumbar Switch 030909539 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 Manual Front Seats Forward Rearward While sitting in the seat lift up on the bar located under Adjustment the seat cushion and move the seat forward or rearward Release the bar once you have reached the desired or passenger seats The seats can be adjusted forward or position Then usine body presets move taryan and rearward by using a bar located by the front of the seat des Me ie Seat e Do ure URP the seat adjaster cushion near the floor eo mm WARNING Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a colli
197. ck hard keys located below the system Press the Screen Off hard key to turn off the Uconnect Access screen Press the Screen Off hard key a second time to turn the screen on Press the Back hard key to exit out of a Menu or certain option on the Uconnect Access system 314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Soft Keys Soft Keys are accessible on the Uconnect Access display Customer Programmable Features Uconnect Access 8 4 Settings Press the Apps soft key then press the Settings soft key to display the menu setting screen In this mode the Uconnect Access system allows you to access program mable features that may be equipped such as Display Clock Safety Assistance Lights Doors amp Locks Auto On Comfort amp Remote Start Engine Off Operation Compass Settings Audio Phone Bluetooth and SiriusXM Setup NOTE Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time When making a selection press the soft key to enter the desired mode Once in the desired mode press and release the preferred setting until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been se lected Once the setting is complete either press the Back Arrow soft key or the Back hard key to return to the previous menu or press the X soft key to close out of the settings screen Pressing the Up or Down Arrow soft keys on the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the available settings
198. cle If the temperature reading does not return to normal turn the engine off immediately and call for service Refer to If Your Engine Overheats in What To Do In Emergencies of your owners manual for more information CAUTION Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call an autho rized dealer for service WARNING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call an authorized dealer for service if your vehicle overheats If you decide to Continued E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289 WARNING Continued look under the hood yourself see Maintaining Your Vehicle Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph 13 Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the anti lock brake system reservoir BRAKE If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged and the
199. crease until the button is released Release the button when the desired speed is reached and the new set speed will be established Pressing the SET button once will result in a 1 mph 1 km h decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph 1 km h While the Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control is set the set speed can be decreased by pressing and holding the SET button If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph 10 km h increments until the button is released The decrease in set speed is reflected in the EVIC display To Cancel The following conditions will cancel the Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control without clearing the memory You softly tap or depress the brake pedal You press the CANCEL button The Electronic Stability Control Traction Control Sys tem ESC TCS activates ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213 The vehicle parking brake is applied The braking temperature exceeds normal range overheated e The shift lever is removed from the Drive position To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push the RES button and release Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph 30 km h To Turn Off The system will turn off and erase the set speed in memory if You push the Normal Fixed Speed ON OFF button You turn off the ignition You engage Four Wheel Drive Low FORWARD C
200. ctivate the trailer brake prior to releas ing the brake pedal Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle HSA is not a parking brake If you stop the vehicle on a hill without putting the transmission in PARK and using the parking brake it will roll down the hill and could cause a collision with another ve hicle or object Always remember to use the park ing brake while parking on a hill and that the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle 406 STARTING AND OPERATING ME HSA Off If you wish to turn off the HSA system it can be done using the Uconnect Access Settings Refer to Uconnect Access Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Ready Alert Braking If Equipped Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to reach full braking during emergency braking situations It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by the driver When the throttle is released very quickly Ready Alert Braking applies a small amount of brake pressure This brake pressure will not be noticed by the driver The brake system uses this brake pressure to allow a fast brake response if the driver applies the brakes Rain Brake Support If Equipped Rain Brake Support may improve braking performance in wet conditions It will periodically apply a small amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup on the f
201. ctive Push Start Button Door Open e Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low Doors Open Remote Start Aborted Too Cold Remote Start Aborted Door Open e e Tailgate Open Gear Not Available Shift Not Allowed Remote Start Aborted Tailgate Open e Shift to Neutral then Drive or Reverse e e e e Remote Start Aborted Hood Open e 302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e e e e e e e Autostick Unavailable Service Required Automatic Unavailable Use Autostick Service Req Transmission Getting Hot Press Brake Trans Hot Stop Safely Shift to Park Wait to Cool Transmission Cool Ready to Drive Service Transmission Service Shifter Engage Park Brake to Prevent Rolling Transmission Too cold Idle with Engine On Washer Fluid Low Service Air Suspension System Normal Ride Height Achieved Aerodynamic Ride Height Achieved Off Road 1 Ride Height Achieved Off Road 2 Ride Height Achieved Entry Exit Ride Height Achieved Selected Ride Height Not Permitted Service Air Suspension System Immediately Reduce Speed To Maintain Selected Ride Height Air Suspension System Cooling Down Please Wait Vehicle Cannot Be Lowered Door Open Off Road 2 Watch For Clearance Entry Exit Watch For Clearance Air Suspension Temporarily Disabled For jacking And Tire Change Battery Low Start Engine To Change Ride Height e Fuel Saved Gal e Fuel Saved L The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the wh
202. cts impact sensors can aid the ORC in determining appropriate response to impact events Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment if the communication network remains intact and the power remains intact depending on the nature of the ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79 event the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow ing functions Cut off fuel to the engine e Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is turned off Turn on the interior lights which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is removed Unlock the doors automatically In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System functions after an event the ignition switch must be changed from IGN ON to IGN OFF If A Deployment Occurs The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment NOTE In a rollover the pretensioners and or SAB and SABIC if equipped air bags may deploy on both sides of the vehicle If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags any or all of the following may occur e The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet o
203. cturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer s service contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s service contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about the service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1 800 521 9922 Canadian residents call 800 465 2001 English 800 387 9983 French 580 The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s service contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s service contract If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer s service contract and you require service after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires please refer to the contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience You will be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or e
204. d or later disabled through the Uconnect system screen Refer to Customer Programmable Features Uconnect Access 8 4 Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD 2 Reach under the hood move safety latch to the left and lift the hood To open the hood two latches must be released 1 Pull the release lever located below the instrument panel and in front of the driver s door 031373456 Safety Latch Location Hood Release ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 CAUTION To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to close it Use a firm downward push at the center of the hood to ensure that both latches engage WARNING Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle If the hood is not fully latched it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death LIGHTS Headlight Switch The headlight switch is located on the left side of the instrument panel next to the steering wheel The head light switch controls the operation of the headlights mm parking lights instrument panel lights cargo lights and fog lights if equipped 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE m NOTE Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight and fog light if equipped len
205. d Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in the front of the trailer This places 10 to 15 of the GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer collisions Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your trailer hitch 057003767 Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle The tongue weight of the trailer The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle The weight of the driver and all passengers ee STARTING AND OPERATING 463 NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to Tire Safety Information Tire and Loading Information Placard in Starting and Operating for further information Towing Requirements To promote proper break in of your new vehicle drive train components the following guidelines are recom mended CAUTION Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles 805 km the new vehicle is driven The engine axle or other parts could be damaged Then during
206. d buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window Sunroof Maintenance Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel 256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Ignition OFF Operation The power sunroof switches remain active for up to approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch has been turned OFF Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time is programmable Refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Set tings Customer Programmable Features in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information COMMANDVIEWG SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE IF EQUIPPED The Command View sunroof switch is located to the left between the sun visors on the overhead console The power shade switch is located to the right between the sun visors on the overhead console 034433149 CommandView Sunroof and Power Shade Switches ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257 WARNING e Never leave children unattended in a vehicle and do not leave the key in the ignition switch or leave the ignition
207. d gaso lines Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as Ethanol Fuels blended with oxygenates may be used in your vehicle CAUTION DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gaso line containing more than 10 Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability prob lems damage critical fuel system components cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard and or cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to illumi nate Pump labels should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than 10 Ethanol Problems that result from using gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10 Ethanol are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may not be covered under warranty 444 STARTING AND OPERATING ME E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles Non FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline containing 10 ethanol E10 Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the vehicle s warranty If a Non FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E 85 fuel the engine will have some or all of these symptoms operate in a lean mode e OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on poor engine performance e poor cold start and cold drivability e increased risk for fuel system component corrosion To fix a
208. d if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor ALR feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions Energy Management Feature This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head on collision This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner This feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant s chest Seat Belt Pretensioners The seat belts for both front seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occu pants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC Like the air bags the preten sioners are single use items A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must
209. d the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings i The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster and an audible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low In addition the EVIC will display a LOW TIRE PRESSURE message for a minimum of five seconds an Inflate Tire to XXX message and a graphic display of the pressure value s with the low tire s displayed in a different color Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel for further information NOTE Your system can be set to display pressure units in PSI or kPa ee STARTING AND OPERATING 439 Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four active road tire s you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the low tire s that is in a different color on the graphic display to the vehicle s recommended cold tire pressure displayed in the Inflate Tire to XXX message The system will automatically update the graphic display of the pressure value s will return to its original color and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressure s have been received The ve hicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h to receive this information SERVICE TPM SYSTEM Warning The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Ligh
210. d water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory engine coolant antifreeze performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 535 Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency Fluid Level Check Brake Master Cylinder The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked when performing under the hood service or immedi ately if the brake system warning lamp indicates system failure The brake master cylinder has a plastic reservoir On the outboard side of the reservoir there is a MAX dot and a
211. dentification Number PIN Keep the PIN in a secure location This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho rized dealer this procedure consists of programming a blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics A blank Key Fob is one that has never been programmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer Sys tem serviced bring all vehicle keys with you to an autho rized dealer Customer Key Programming Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules Part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause unde sired operation VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED This Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors liftgate and ignition for unauthorized operation When the alarm is activated the interior switches for door locks and power liftgate are disabled The Vehicle Secu rity Alarm provides both audio and visual signals the horn will sound the headlights will turn on park lamps and or turn signals will flash repeatedly for three min utes If the disturbance is still present driver
212. der Belt Anchorage Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions Automatic Locking Retractor Mode ALR If Equipped Energy Management Feature Seat Belt Pretensioners 000 Supplemental Active Head Restraints AHR Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert amp en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 Seat Belt Lock Out si ass sex E ce nn 67 Wi ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS 108 Seat Belts And Pregnant Women 67 aM SAFETY TIPS Lue RR RRRESRERSESU 109 Seat Belt Extender eas datare 67 Transporting Passengers sess 109 2 Supplemental Restraint System SRS Exhaust Gas gt cocca cro sceriaceraseri as 110 Ait Bags eanga na Gan GA ee 2 eed ai 68 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside Advanced Front Air Bag Features 70 The Vehicle L 2 ss3 er e RES nee oe 111 Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls 74 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Event Data Recorder EDR sess 82 Outside The Vehicle 04 113 Child Restraints leen 83 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system This system consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and a Keyless Ignition Node KIN Keyless Enter N Go Feature This vehic
213. designed to meet all emis sions regulations and provide satisfactory fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded gasoline having an octane range of 87 to 89 The manufacturer recommends the use of 89 octane for optimum perfor mance The use of premium gasoline is not recommended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experi ence these symptoms try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications the World wide Fuel Charter WWFC which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions performance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recom mends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC speci fications if they are available ee STARTING AND OPERATING 443 Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality The manufacturer supports the use of reformulate
214. detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and they would result in additional cost Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel Fuel System Cautions assistance The use of fuel additives which are now being CAUTION sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Most of these products contain high concentrations Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s performance of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor mance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor mance and damage the emissions control system NOTE Intentional tampering with the emissions control Continued system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you 446 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Continued Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main tenance Have the exhaust system inspected every Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the vehicle is sto
215. ds and perform different steering handling and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on On Off Road type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to main tain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals More frequent rotation is permis sible if desired The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being per formed NOTE The premium Tire Pressure Monitor System will automatically locate the pressure values displayed in the correct vehicle position following a tire rotation The suggested rotation method is the forward cross shown in the following diagram EL SS E 055703771 Tire Rotation STARTING AND OPERATING 435 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module NOTE It is particularly important for you to regularly check the tire pressure in all of your tires and to maintain the proper pressure The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS consists of
216. e For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road charac teristics and climate Traction Grades The Traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance 584 WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
217. e Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the spare tire the TPMS will update automatically In addition the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions This device may not cause harmful interference This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the follow ing licenses United States Canada MRXC4W4MA4 2546A C4W4MA4 442 STARTING AND OPERATING EBENEN FUEL REQUIREMENTS 3 6L Engine If Equipped This engine is designed to meet all emis sions regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded regular gasoline ab having an octane rating of 87 The use of premium gasoline is not recommended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines 5 7L Engine If Equipped This engine is
218. e of start can be dangerous if done improperly Refer to Jump Starting in What To Do In Emergen cies for further information Clearing A Flooded Engine Using ENGINE START STOP Button If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded To clear any excess fuel 1 Press and hold the brake pedal 2 Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it 3 Press and release the ENGINE START STOP button once The starter motor will engage automatically run for 10 seconds and then disengage Once this occurs release the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure Clearing A Flooded Engine Using Fob With Integrated Key If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded To clear any excess fuel 1 Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it 2 Turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages 356 STARTING AND OPERATING ME The starter motor will disengage automatically in 10 sec onds Once this occurs release the accelerator pedal turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure CAUTION To prevent damage to t
219. e Mirrors Folding Feature 125 Power Folding Outside Mirrors It Equipped sess eed me eem 125 Power MiIrfOIS ecer stie ed e X ERAS e 126 Outside Automatic Dimming Mirrors If Equipped o cesso cso e Rn 127 Heated Mirrors If Equipped Tilt Mirrors In Reverse Available With Memory Seat Only If Equipped Illuminated Vanity Mirrors Sun Visor Slide On Rod Feature It Equipped 1 ses eter Rees E BLIND SPOT MONITORING IF EQUIPPED R as Cross Path s ces TERRE Modes Of Operation ss ono saa dora asiaa a a SEALS eaei ee eaa eRe eRe e ba ae 138 Power Seats If Equipped 138 Passenger s Power Seat isses 141 Power Lumbar If Equipped 142 Manual Front Seats Forward Rearward Adjustment 2a hte oe Ye edes 143 Manual Front Passenger Seatback Adjustment Recline iu seed nate E eee ene 144 Front Passenger Seat Fold Flat Feature IF Equipped expe vh ERRORES 144 Heated Seats If Equipped 145 Front Ventilated Seats With Uconnect 8 4 8 4A If Equipped 149 Head Restraints llle 150 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME 60 40 Split Rear Seat 0 000 154
220. e ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming A Non Rolling Code Step 2 and follow all remaining steps Canadian Gate Operator Programming For programming transmitters in Canada United States that require the transmitter signals to time out after several seconds of transmission Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of trans mission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor 1 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position 2 Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 in 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view 250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME 9 Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release cycle your hand held transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has successfully accepted the frequency signal The indi cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained Watch f
221. e RCP system will then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is detected alert the driver 030405522 RCP Detection Zones RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of the vehicle for objects that are moving toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 3 mph 5 km h to objects moving a maximum of approximately 20 mph 32 km h such as in parking lot situations 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se NOTE In a parking lot situation oncoming vehicles can be obscured by vehicles parked on either side If the sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles the system will not be able to alert the driver When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE the driver is alerted using both the visual and audible alarms including reducing the radio volume WARNING RCP is not a Back Up Aid system It is intended to be used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using RCP Always check carefully behind your vehicle look behind you and be sure to check for pedestrians animals other vehicles obstructions and blind spots before back ing up Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death Modes Of Operation Modes Of Operation With EVIC Three selectable modes of operation are available in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electro
222. e Reasonable With Requests 577 Bg MOPAR PARTS eene 581 B IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE 577 W REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS 581 Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center 578 In The 50 United States And Washington D C 0 0 6 ee 581 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center 578 In Mexico contact losa 4456 file y auia 579 In Canada ioi bepe de ortarpe d Puriri ll PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS 576 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M ll DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION Traction Grades cacti are oea a 00000 583 UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES 583 Tieadwe at snm rea veo 5r EEE E 583 Temperature Grades lisse 584 EN F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 577 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you are having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you mu
223. e Screen Setup display icon is highlighted in the EVIC Press and release the RIGHT arrow button to enter the Screen Setup sub menu The Screen Setup feature allows you to change what information is displayed in the instrument cluster as well as the location that information is displayed Driver Assist zm Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow P button until the Driver Assist display icon is WE highlighted in the EVIC Press and release the RIGHT arrow button to display the Adaptive Cruise Control sub menu For further information refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC If Equipped in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle Terrain Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Terrain display icon is high lighted in the EVIC Press and release the RIGHT arrow button to display the Selec Terrain Air Suspension Drivetrain Vehicle Pitch Vehicle Roll Vehicle Altitude and Wheel Articulation La ggg gl 7 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311 Diagnostics If Equipped Upper Left e None Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow Us button until the Diagnostics display icon is Compas highlighted in the EVIC Press and release the e Outside Temp default setting RIGHT arrow button to display the diagnostic trouble codes and descriptions Oil Temp Current Gear On Current Gear Off Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items Odometer e 000 e Time e 000 0 e Range To Empty RTE Av
224. e is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme condi tions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and underbody protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation Stone and gravel impact Insects tree sap and tar Salt in the air near seacoast localities Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants 542 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE Washing e e e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with clear water If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu lated on your vehicle use MOPARO Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove Use a high quality cleaner wax such as MOPAR Cleaner Wax to remove road film stains and to protect your paint finish Take care never to scratch the paint Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish CAUTION Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch metal and painted surfaces Use of power washers exceeding 1 2
225. e label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not be
226. e retractor As the webbing retracts you will hear a clicking sound This means the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor If it is locked you should not be able to pull out any web bing If the retractor is not locked repeat step 5 Finally pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint while you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 103 Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching Latch Plate CINCH If Equipped 8 If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether anchorage connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap Refer to Lower Anchors and Tethers for Chil dren LATCH Restraint System for directions to attach a tether anchor Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path It should not move more than 1 inch 25 4 mm in any direction Any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary 1 2 Place the child seat in the center of the seating position For some second row seats you may need to recline the seat and or raise the head restraint to get a better fit Next pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to pass it t
227. e tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle transmission in PARK For four wheel drive vehicles make sure the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL Always block or chock the trailer wheels e GCWR must not be exceeded Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 465 WARNING Continued e Total weight must be distributed between the tow E vehicle and the trailer such that the following four Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres ratings are not exceeded sures before trailer usage Tires General Information in Starting and Oper ating for proper tire inflation procedures 1 GVWR Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Operating for the proper inspection 3 GAWR procedure 4 Trailer tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch e When replacing tires refer to Tires General Infor utilized mation in Starting and Operating for the proper tire replacement procedures Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle s Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact GVWR and GAWR limits spare tire 2 GTW Towing Requirements Tires Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to 466 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes e e Do not interconnect the hydraulic
228. e when leaving the vehicle in this range When parking on a level surface you may shift the transmission into PARK first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill apply the parking brake before shifting the transmission to PARK As an added precau tion turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade NOTE On four wheel drive vehicles be sure that the transfer case is in a drive position WARNING e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle move ment and possible injury or damage Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not in PARK Check by trying to move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake pedal released Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leaving the vehicle e It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal the Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 363 WARNING Continued vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re verse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should ne
229. ealer for service NOTE On vehicles equipped with High Intensity Dis charge HID headlamps when the headlamps are turned on there is a blue hue to the lamps This diminishes and becomes more white after approximately 10 seconds as the system charges Halogen Headlamps If Equipped 1 Open the hood 2 Turn the low or high beam bulb one quarter turn counterclockwise to remove from housing 3 Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the bulb CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol 558 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se Front Turn Signal Front Fog Lamps 1 Open the hood 1 Reach through the cutout in the splash shield and 2 Turn the turn signal bulb one quarter turn counter Mu ML d connector clockwise to remove from housing 2 Firmly grasp the bulb by the two latches and squeeze them together to unlock the bulb from the back of the front fog lamp housing CAUTION 3 Pull the bulb straight out from the keyed opening in the housing CAUTION e Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil 3 Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the bulb Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol cont
230. easily with a soft cloth and MOPARQ Total Clean Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents deter gents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 545 WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog lights if equipped that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPARG Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped with the rad
231. eat belt the switch when the desired position is reached which could result in serious injury or death WARNING CAUTION Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat s path injury or death e Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt Continued E UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 Passenger s Power Seat Some models are equipped with a six way power pas senger seat The power seat switch is located on the outboard side of the seat The switch is used to control the movement of the seat and seat cushion Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward Push the seat switch forward or rearward the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position has been reached Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down Pull upward or push downward on the seat switch the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position is rea
232. eat moves depends on where you have the driver seat positioned when you remove the Key Fob from the ignition or change the ignition to OFF for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go e When you remove the Key Fob from the ignition or change the ignition to OFF for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go the driver seat will move about 2 4 in 60 mm rearward if the driver seat position is greater than or equal to 2 7 in 67 7 mm forward of the rear stop The seat will return to its previously set position when you place the ignition into the ACC or RUN position e When you remove the Key Fob from the ignition or change the ignition to OFF for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go the driver seat will move to a position 0 3 in 7 7 mm forward of the rear stop if the driver seat position is between 0 9 in and 2 7 in 22 7 mm and 67 7 mm forward of the rear stop The seat will return to its previously set position when you place the ignition to the ACC or RUN position The Easy Entry Easy Exit feature is disabled when the driver seat position is less than 0 9 in 22 7 mm forward of the rear stop At this position there is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or Easy Entry Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy Entry and Easy Exit position NOTE The Easy Entry Exit feature is not enabled when the vehicle is delivered from the factory The Easy Entry Exit feature is enable
233. ed To resume a previously set speed push the RES button and release Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph 30 km h To Vary The Speed Setting When the Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control is set you can increase speed by pushing the SET button If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released then the new set speed will be established Pressing the SET button once will result in a 1 mph 1 km h increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph 1 km h While the Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control is set you can increase the set speed by pressing and holding the SET button If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to increase in 5 mph 10 km h increments until the button is released The increase in set speed is reflected in the EVIC display To decrease speed while the Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control is set push the SET button If the button is continually held in the SET position the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released Release the button when the desired speed is reached and the new set speed will be established Pressing the SET button once will result in a 1 mph 1 km h decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph 1 km h ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187 While the Normal
234. ed check the front of the A C condenser located in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance MAX A C MAX A C sets the control for maximum cooling perfor mance Press and release to toggle between MAX A C and the prior settings The soft key illuminates when MAX A C is ON In MAX A C the blower level and mode position can be adjusted to desired user settings Pressing other settings will cause the MAX A C operation to switch to the prior settings and the MAX A C indicator will turn off es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339 Recirculation When outside air contains smoke odors or amp high humidity or if rapid cooling is desired you may wish to recirculate interior air by pressing the Recirculation control button The recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button is selected Push the button a second time to turn off the Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle NOTE In cold weather use of Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging The recirculation feature may be unavailable soft button greyed out if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the wind shield On systems with Manual Climate Controls the Recirculation mode is not allowed in D
235. ed and meet the requirements of Material Standard MS 6395 MS 6395 contains additional requirements developed during ex tensive fleet testing to provide additional protection to Chrysler Group LLC engines Use MOPAR or an equiva lent oil meeting the specification MS 6395 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 449 Starting The characteristics of E 85 fuel make it unsuitable for use when ambient temperatures fall below 0 F 18 C In the range of 0 F 18 C to 32 F 0 C you may experience an increase in the time it takes for your engine to start and a deterioration in driveability sags and or hesitations until the engine is fully warmed up NOTE Use of the engine block heater if equipped is beneficial for E 85 startability when the ambient tempera ture is less than 32 F 0 C Cruising Range Because E 85 fuel contains less energy per gallon liter than gasoline you will experience an increase in fuel consumption You can expect your miles per gallon mpg miles per liter and your driving range to decrease by about 30 compared to gasoline operation Replacement Parts Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle FFV are designed to be compatible with ethanol Always be sure that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol com patible parts CAUTION Replacing fuel system components with non ethanol compatible components can damage your vehicle Maintenance CAUTION Do not use ethanol mixture grea
236. eel mi e a c Nw g L Radio Player Controls Climate Nav Phone More cause burns even at low temperatures especially if Heated Steering Wheel Soft Key used for long periods NOTE The engine must be running for the heated Do not place anything on the steering wheel that steering wheel to operate insulates against heat such as a blanket or steering wheel covers of any type and material This may Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start cause the steering wheel heater to overheat On models that are equipped with remote start the heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on 184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED When engaged the Electronic Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 20 mph 32 km h The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of the steering wheel 032173457 Electronic Speed Control Buttons 1 ON OFF 4 SET DECEL 2 SET ACCEL 5 CANCEL 3 RESUME ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185 NOTE In order to ensure proper operation the Elec tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the same time If this occurs the Electronic Speed Control System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed To Activate Push the ON
237. eel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Do not use oven cleaner These products may damage the wheel s protective finish Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel s pro tective finish Only MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended 544 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure If Equipped Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean dry towel Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel e For tough stains apply MOPAR Total Clean or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue For grease stains apply MOPAR Multi Purpose Cleaner to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products Interior Care Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed
238. efrost mode to improve window clearing operation Recirculation will be disabled automatically if this mode is selected Attempting to use Recirculation while in this mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink and then turn off Automatic Temperature Control ATC Automatic Operation 1 Press the AUTO hard key or soft key button 4 on the Automatic Temperature Control ATC Panel 2 Next adjust the temperature you would like the system to maintain by adjusting the driver and pas senger temperature hard or soft control buttons 7 8 13 14 Once the desired temperature is displayed the system will achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level 3 When the system is set up for your comfort level it is not necessary to change the settings You will experi ence the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically 340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME NOTE e tis not necessary to move the temperature settings for cold or hot vehicles The system automatically adjusts the temperature mode and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible The temperature can be displayed in U S or Metric units by selecting the US M customer programmable feature Refer to the Uconnect System Settings in this section of the manual To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic mode during cold start ups the blower fan will remain on low until the engine warms
239. eft alarm is arming The light will flash at a slower speed continuously after the alarm is set The security light will also come on for about three seconds when the ignition is first turned on m 20 Electronic Stability Control ESC OFF Indicator Light If Equipped This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con trol ESC is off 294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME 21 Electronic Stability Control ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light If Equipped ee The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position It should go out with the engine running If the ESC Activation Malfunction In dicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected NOTE The ESC Off Indicator Light and the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to ON RUN Each time the ignition is turned to ON RUN the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is norm
240. eft or right to select Trip A or Trip B The Trip A information will display the following ast e Distance e Average Fuel Economy e Average Speed e Elapsed Time Hold the OK button to reset all the information Trip B Press and release the Left or Right arrow but I tripB ton until the Trip B icon is highlighted in the EVIC Toggle left or right to select Trip A or Trip B The Trip B information will display the following Distance Average Fuel Economy Average Speed Elapsed Time Hold the OK button to reset all the information UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309 Fuel Economy Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button Hy until the Fuel Economy icon is highlighted Average Fuel Economy Miles Per Gallon MPG Bar graph Range To Empty RTE e Current Miles Per Gallon MPG Stored Messages Messages display icon is highlighted in the EVIC This feature shows the number of stored warning messages Pressing the RIGHT arrow button will allow you to see what the stored messages are ea Press and release the UP arrow button until the 310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Audio Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Audio display icon is highlighted in the x EVIC Press and release the RIGHT arrow button to scroll through the sub menus and press the OK button display the active source Screen Setup Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow SAE button until th
241. els TPMS pressures have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equip ment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor 438 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE e The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition e The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure an
242. ended oil quality requirements are met and the recom mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Materials Added To Engine Oil The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addi tion of any additives other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your authorized dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in 7 your area 518 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection This manufacturer s engines have a full flow type oil filter Use a filter of this type for replacement The quality of replacement filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPARQ engine oil filters are a high quality oil filter and are recommended Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING The air induction system air cleaner hoses etc can provide a measu
243. ent Parts 00 00 cee eee Replacement Tires aces ciem Reed E em be 6 Reporting Safety Defects 508 INDEX eee Restraints Childi si aissa uoc eee acu Xen 83 Restraints Occupant a nee Ge wale bd 49 Retractable Cargo Area Cover issus 274 Roll Over Warning ese seed d Re RR n 5 Rotation Tires se hae 30060645 44 464 eh RE d 434 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 111 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 113 Safety Defects Reporting llle 581 Safety Exhaust Gas llle sees 48 Safety Information Tire 00000 411 Safety TipSs as ces sean eaves ideas DEEP IR 109 Schedule Maintenance 0000000 e 568 Seat Belt Maintenance 000004 546 Seat Belt Reminder llle 66 Seat Belis isc cuca gees RR re ras 52 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 58 And Pregnant Women 0 0 0 0000200 67 Child Restraimt e sasasi ranere tes Rr ak ew 83 Extend 2 oe ise Bae cec rese aie CR eed 67 Front Seat isee dea eisk eee Se ape card rk fd 52 Inspectiona d ed dte debes 111 Pretensioners l l 61 Reminder seere teninta eq due P dC ges 285 Shoulder Belt Anchorage 0004 58 Untwisting Procedure 000 0 58 OedlS sv dba ERE UG UR Lee eRe SEXUS Y 138 Adjustment 2 6 iia ead ieee es Gd XR rs 143 Easy ENY pe aeniea gh eo Bh soo eee as 160 Memory x deem ER REC ORR EI OS 156 POWED i2zcadedaee SRR
244. epending on which mode you are in The following describes the left hand control operation in each mode Radio Operation Pressing the top of the switch will Seek up for the next listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch will Seek down for the next listenable station The button located in the center of the left hand control will tune to the next preset station that you have pro grammed in the radio preset pushbutton CD Player Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the CD Pressing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the second track three times it will play the third etc es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331 CD DVD BLU RAY DISC MAINTENANCE To keep a CD DVD Blu ray disc in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratch ing the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzene thinner cleaners or anti static sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do notstore the disc where temperatures may become
245. er a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor ALR or a cinching latch plate or both Both types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip The ALR retractor can 100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE be switched into a locked mode by pulling all of the Lap Shoulder Belt Systems for Installing Child webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing Restraints in this Vehicle retract back into the retractor If it is locked the ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the retractor For additional information on ALR refer to the Automatic Locking Mode description un der Occupant Restraints The cinching latch plate is designed to hold the lap portion of the seatbelt tight when webbing is pulled tight and straight through a child restraint s belt path Please see the table below and the following sections for more information about both types of seat belts 022668725 ALR Anchor Locations es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101 What is the weight limit child s weight weight of the child restraint for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a forward facing child restraint Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to install a forward facing child restraint up to the recommended
246. er stability Trailer sway control and a weight distributing load equalizing hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights TW and may be required depending on Vehicle and Trailer configuration loading to comply with gross axle weight rating GAWR requirements An improperly adjusted weight distributing hitch system may reduce handling stability and braking performance and could result in a collision Weight distributing hitch systems may not be com patible with Surge Brake Couplers Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional informa tion STARTING AND OPERATING 459 057007122 057007121 Without Weight Distributing Hitch Incorrect With Weight Distributing Hitch Correct 460 STARTING AND OPERATING 057007120 Improper Adjustment Of Weight Distributing Hitch Incorrect Trailer Hitch Classification The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions Class Max Trailer Hitch Industry Standards Class I Light Duty 2 000 Ibs 907 kg Class II Medium Duty 3 500 Ibs 1 587 kg Class III Heavy Duty 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg Class IV Extra Heavy Duty 10 000 Ibs 4 540 kg Refer to the Trailer Towing
247. erage MPG Current MPG e Trip A e Standard PRND Gear Indicator e Single Character D Gear Indicator e Trip B 312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss Upper Right e e e e e e None Compass default setting Outside Temp Oil Temp Time Range To Empty RTE Average MPG Current MPG Trip A Trip B Restore To Defaults Restores All Settings To Default Settings e Cancel e Okay Uconnect amp ACCESS SETTINGS The Uconnect Access system uses a combination of soft and hard keys located on the center of the instrument panel that allows you to access and change the customer programmable features E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313 72 SxXm3 Applications gt Favorite Meda m Travel Link Apps a Uconnect Registration Appa 10 18 N 56 ou Add New Favorite Uconnect Access soft keys and hard keys 1 Uconnect Access Soft Keys 2 Uconnect Access Hard Keys Hard Keys Hard Keys are located below the Uconnect amp Access system in the center of the instrument panel In addition there is a Scroll Enter control knob located on the right side of the Climate Controls in the center of the instru ment panel Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and change settings ie 30 60 90 press the center of the control knob one or more times to select or change a setting i e ON OFF Your Uconnect Access system may also have a Screen Off and Ba
248. ery and powered at all times NOTE e All accessories connected to the battery powered outlets should be removed or turned off when the vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against discharge To ensure proper cigar lighter operation a MOPAR knob and element must be used ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261 CAUTION Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty The front power outlet is located inside the storage area on the center stack of the instrument panel Push inward on the storage lid to open the compartment and gain access to this power outlet Front Power Outlet 262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE In addition to the front power outlet thereisalso a power The rear power outlet is located in the right rear cargo outlet located in the storage area of the center console area 034773368 Center Console Outlet Rear Power Outlet 034609793 ig UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263 NOTE The rear power outlet can be switched to bat tery powered all the time by switching the power outlet right rear quarter panel fuse in the fuse panel Power Outlet Fuse Locations 1 F104 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Console Bin 2 F90 F
249. es Using The Panic Alarm To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off press and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one second and release When the Panic Alarm is on the headlights will turn on the park lights will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph 24 km h or greater NOTE The interior lights will turn off if you cycle the ignition switch to the ACC or ON RUN position while the Panic Alarm is activated However the exterior lights and horn will remain on You may need to be less than 35 ft 11 m from the vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted by the system Programming Additional Transmitters Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer Transmitter Battery Replacement The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032 battery NOTE Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 1 Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical latch on the back of the RKE transmitter side
250. es with cast iron housings CAUTION Do not over tighten the plugs as it could damage then and cause them to leak Selection Of Lubricant Use only the manufacturer s recommended fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintain ing Your Vehicle for further information 538 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se CAUTION Transfer Case Fluid Level Check For normal service periodic fluid level checks are not required When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons the exterior surfaces of the transfer case assembly should be inspected If oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Adding Fluid Add fluid at the filler hole until it runs out of the hole when the vehicle is in a level position Drain First remove fill plug then remove drain plug Recom mended tightening torque for drain and fill plugs is 15 to 25 ft Ibs 20 to 34 N m When installing plugs do not overtighten You could damage them and cause them to leak Selection Of Lubricant Use only the manufacturer s recommended fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintain ing Your Vehicle for further information Automatic Transmission Selection Of Lubricant It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to ensure optimum transmission performance and life Use only the manufacturer s reco
251. escription 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification blank Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL tire Extra Load XL Extra load or reinforced tire Light Load LL Light load tire C D E E G Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire E STARTING AND OPERATING 415 Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on however the date code may only be on one side Tires the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the Side of the tire date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire
252. esired Speed Turn the Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control ON When the vehicle has reached the desired speed press the SET or SET button and release Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed Once a speed has been set a message CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH KM will appear indicating what speed was set An indicator CRUISE will also appear and stay on in the instrument cluster when the speed is set To Vary The Speed Setting When the Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control is set you can increase speed by pushing the SET button If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released then the new set speed will be established 212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Pressing the SET button once will result in a 1 mph 1 km h increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph 1 km h While the Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control is set you can increase the set speed by pressing and holding the SET button If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to increase in 5 mph 10 km h increments until the button is released The increase in set speed is reflected in the EVIC display To decrease speed while the Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control is set push the SET button If the button is continually held in the SET position the set speed will continue to de
253. faces or hydroplaning e The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others 400 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver s steering wheel input and the speed of the vehicle When ERM determines that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle s speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift it then applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur ERM will only intervene during very severe or evasive driving maneuvers ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers It cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as road conditions leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles WARNING Many factors such as vehicle loading road condi tions and driving conditions influence the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or rollovers especially those that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles The capabilities of an ERM equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Electronic Stability Control E
254. flow rate is reduced If you must cross flowing water avoid depths in excess of 9 inches 23 cm The flowing water can erode the streambed causing your vehicle to sink into deeper water Determine exit point s that are downstream of your entry point to allow for drifting ee STARTING AND OPERATING 389 Standing Water Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 20 inches 51 cm and reduce speed appropriately to minimize wave effects Maximum speed in 20 inches 51 cm of water is less than 5 mph 8 km h Maintenance After driving through deep water inspect your vehicle fluids and lubricants engine oil transmission oil axle transfer case to assure the fluids have not been contami nated Contaminated fluid milky foamy in appearance should be flushed changed as soon as possible to pre vent component damage Driving In Snow Mud And Sand In heavy snow when pulling a load or for additional control at slower speeds shift the transmission to a low gear and shift the transfer case to 4WD LOW if necessary Refer to Four Wheel Drive Operation in Starting and Operating for further information Do not shift to a lower gear than necessary to maintain forward motion Over revving the engine can spin the wheels and traction will be lost Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads be cause engine braking may cause skidding and loss of control Hill Climbing NOTE Before attempting to climb a hill dete
255. fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Electronic Stability Control ESC system In this case the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected If the problem is related to the brake booster the ABS pump will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary 290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se WARNING Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have a collision Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with the Anti Lock Brake System ABS are
256. for approximately 1 5 seconds the warning light will be illuminated If the difference in speed between the two vehicles is greater than 15 mph 24 km h the warning light will not illuminate Overtaking Passing Overtaking Approaching 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are stationary objects such as guardrails posts walls foliage traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in berms etc However occasionally the system may alert adjacent lanes on such objects This is normal operation and your vehicle does not require service Opposing Traffic Stationary Objects ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 WARNING The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to help detect objects in the blind spot zones The BSM system is not designed to detect pedestrians bicy clists or animals Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM system always check your vehicles mirrors glance over your shoulder and use your turn signal before changing lanes Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death Rear Cross Path The Rear Cross Path RCP feature is intended to aid the driver when backing out of parking spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked Proceed slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is exposed Th
257. from the factory Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or mounting can cause interference with the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the vehicle ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 113 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks Inspect sidewalls for cuts cracks and bulges Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper cold inflation pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Door Latches Check for positive closing latching and locking Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS B MIRRORS 2c xLhExae DE RR REESE dds 123 Inside Day Night Mirror 123 Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped 124 Outside Mirrors s sesgos patanya t egri 00s 125 Outsid
258. front passenger seat is unoccupied BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat if equipped It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts and cargo is properly stowed BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your autho rized dealer Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert NOTE Although BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the driver s or front passenger if equipped with BeltAlert seat belt remains unfastened ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 Seat Belt Lock Out The center rear seat belt system has a lock out feature that will not allow you to extract the center webbing unless the rear seat upper latch is engaged Seat Belts And Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if
259. further information Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine Selection Of Coolant coolant antifreeze products Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator CAUTION e Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than specified Organic Additive Technology OAT en gine coolant antifreeze may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection Continued Continued ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 531 CAUTION Continued e This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze Use of propylene glycol based engine coolant anti freeze is not recommended Adding Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant OAT coolant conforming to MS 12106 that allows extended maintenance intervals This engine coolant antifreeze can be used up to ten years or 150 000 miles 240 000 km before replacement To pre vent reducing this extended maintenance period it is important that you use the same engine coolant OAT coolant conforming to MS 12106 throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for using Organic Additive Technology OAT engine coolant antifreeze that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan dard MS 12106 When adding engine coolant antifreeze e We recommend using MOPAR Antif
260. g Pressing the LIFTGATE button located on left rear trim panel once will close the liftgate only this button cannot be used to open the liftgate ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 When the LIFTGATE button on the RKE transmitter is pressed two times the turn signals will flash twice to signal that the liftgate is opening or closing if Flash Lamps with Lock is enabled in the EVIC and the liftgate chime will be audible For further information refer to Uconnect in Understanding Your Instrument Panel NOTE n the event of a power malfunction to the liftgate an emergency liftgate latch release can be used to open the liftgate The emergency liftgate latch release can be accessed through a snap in cover located on the lift gate trim panel e If liftgate is left open for an extended period of time the liftgate may need to be closed manually to reset power liftgate functionality WARNING During power operation personal injury or cargo damage may occur Ensure the liftgate travel path is clear Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched before driving away NOTE The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph 0 km h The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures below 22 F 30 C or temperatures above 150 F 65 C Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice from the liftgate before pressing any of the power lif
261. gh all forward gears The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris tics under all normal operating conditions When frequent transmission shifting occurs such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi tions in hilly terrain traveling into strong head winds or while towing heavy trailers use the Paddle Shift switches refer to Paddle Shift Mode in this section to select a lower gear Under these conditions using or a lower gear will improve performance and extend trans mission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup During extremely cold temperatures 22 F 30 C or below transmission operation may be modified depend ing on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level 366 STARTING AND OPERATING ME SPORT This mode alters the transmission s automatic shift sched ule for sportier driving Upshift speeds are increased to make full use of available engine power To switch between DRIVE and SPORT modes tap the shift lever rearward SPORT mode is only accessible from DRIVE Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated In this mode the transmission may operate only in certain gears or may not shift at all
262. gine Oil Viscosity 3 6L Engine SAE 5W 20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to the Engine Com partment illustration in this section NOTE SAE 5W 30 engine oil approved to Fiat 9 55535 S1 or Fiat 9 55535 S3 may be used when SAE 5W 20 engine oil meeting MS 6395 is not available Engine Oil Viscosity 5 7L Engine SAE 5W 20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 517 The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Com partment in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information NOTE Vehicles equipped with a 5 7L engine must use SAE 5W 20 oil Failure to do so may result in improper operation of the Fuel Saver Technology Refer to Fuel Saver Technology If Equipped in Starting and Oper ating for further information Lubricants that do not have both the engine oil certifi cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom m
263. h the engine running 2 Press and hold the brake pedal 3 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL sion ensure the vehicle is set to Normal Ride Height Using a ballpoint pen or similar object press and hold the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL N button lo cated by the selector switch for four seconds The light behind the N symbol will blink indicating shift in progress The light will stop blinking stay on solid when the shift to NEUTRAL N is complete A FOUR WHEEL DRIVE SYSTEM IN NEUTRAL message will display on the EVIC Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information 0582003302 NEUTRAL N Switch 6 After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL N light stays on release the NEUTRAL N button 7 Shift the transmission into REVERSE STARTING AND OPERATING 475 8 Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure that there is no vehicle movement 9 Shift the transmission back into NEUTRAL 10 With the transmission and transfer case in NEU TRAL press and hold the ENGINE START STOP button until the engine turns off Turning the engine off will automatically place the transmission in PARK 11 Press the ENGINE STOP START button again with out pressing the brake pedal if needed to turn the ignition switch to the OFF position 12 Firmly apply the parking brake 13
264. hat enter the blind spot zones from the rear front side of the vehicle Rear Detection Zones When the vehicle is started the BSM warning light will momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors to let the driver know that the system is operational The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand by mode when the vehicle is in PARK 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft or 3 8 m The zone starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends ap proximately 23 ft 7 m to the rear of the vehicle The BSM system monitors the detection zones on both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed has reached approxi mately 6 mph 10 km h or higher and will alert the driver of vehicles in these areas NOTE The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the de tection zones The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if your vehicle is towing a trailer Therefore visually verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle and trailer before making a lane change If the trailer or other object i e bicycle sports equipment extends beyond the side of your vehicle this may result in the BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire time the vehicle is in a forward gear The area on the rear fascia where the r
265. he cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution Never add engine coolant antifreeze when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pres sure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure e Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or engine damage may result ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 533 Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by ani mals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child or pet seek emergency assistance immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate With the engine OFF and cold the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for engine coolant antifreeze freeze point or replacing cool ant Advise your
266. he OFF position the shift lever is locked in PARK securing the vehicle against un wanted movement has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed e Do not shift between PARK REVERSE NEUTRAL or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal Continued NOTE You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting out of PARK 358 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Continued Children should be warned not to touch the park ing brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or WARNING Continued e It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re verse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal When leaving the vehicle always remove the key Key Ignition Park Interlock fob and lock your vehicle e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured in a location accessible to children and do not leave the ignition
267. he TCS portion of ESC except for the BLD feature described in the TCS section has been disabled and the ESC Off Indicator Light will be illuminated All other stability features of ESC function normally This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow sand or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESC would nor mally allow is required to gain traction To turn ESC on again momentarily press the ESC OFF switch This will restore the normal ESC On mode of operation ee STARTING AND OPERATING 403 NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by pressing the ESC OFF switch Once the situation requiring ESC to be switched to the Partial Off mode is overcome turn ESC back on by momen tarily pressing the ESC OFF switch This may be done while the vehicle is in motion 4WD Low Range Partial Off This is the normal operating mode for ESC in 4WD LOW range Whenever the vehicle is started in 4WD LOW range or the transfer case if equipped is shifted from 4WD HIGH range or NEUTRAL to 4WD LOW range the ESC system will be in the Partial Off mode Trailer Sway Control TSC TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an exces sively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway The system may reduce engine power and apply
268. he bezel when Press And Release needed The flashlight features two bright LED light bulbs and is powered by rechargeable lithium batteries that recharge when snapped back into place 272 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se To operate the flashlight press the switch once for high Cargo Storage Bins Hisce dorJows ande Hae Bine TO SQ OH There are four removable storage bins located in the rear cargo area There are two storage bins located on either side of the cargo area NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with a rear subwoofer the passenger side cargo area will not be available N 035410217 Three Press Switch Rear Storage Bins UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 273 Two additional storage bins are located under the load N floor To access the lower storage bins raise the load floor and attach the tether hook attached to the bottom of the load floor to the liftgate opening THs 035409797 Lower Storage Bins 035409796 Tether Strap 274 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Retractable Cargo Area Cover If Equipped NOTE The purpose of this cover is for privacy not to secure loads It will not prevent cargo from shifting or protect passengers from loose cargo To cover the cargo area 1 Grasp the cover at the center handle Pull it over the cargo area 2 Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into the slots in the pillar trim cover 3 The liftgate may
269. he correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission Transfer Case Single Speed Quadra Trac I We recommend you use Shell Automatic Transmission Fluid 3353 Transfer Case Two Speed Quadra Trac II amp We recommend you use MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Axle Differential Front We recommend you use MOPAR Synthetic Gear amp Axle Lubricant SAE 75W 140 API GL5 in addition with friction modifier additive Axle Differential Rear With Electronic Limited Slip Differential ELSD We recommend you use MOPAR Synthetic Gear amp Axle Lubricant SAE 75W 90 API GL5 Axle Differential Rear Without Electronic Limited Slip Differential ELSD We recommend you use MOPAR Synthetic Gear amp Axle Lubricant SAE 75W 85 API GL5 566 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR DOT 3 Brake Fluid SAE J1703 should be used If DOT 3 SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Power Steering Reservoir We recommend you use MOPAR Hydraulic Fluid 3 6L Engine Power Steering Reservoir We recommend you use MOPAR Power Steering Fluid 4 or MOPAR ATF 4 5 7L Engine Automatic Transmission Fluid MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS B MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE 568 Maintenance Chart l
270. he ignition switch in the ON position the Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate 396 STARTING AND OPERATING ME NOTE WARNING e When the parking brake is applied and the transmis sion is placed in gear the Brake Warning Light will flash If vehicle speed is detected a chime will sound to alert the driver Fully release the parking brake before attempting to move the vehicle e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle move ment and possible injury or damage e When leaving the vehicle always remove the key This light only shows that the parking brake is ap fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle Never plied It does not show the degree of brake application leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever e When parking on a hill it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade Apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK The parking br
271. he starter wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again After Starting The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will decrease as the engine warms up ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms the engine and permits quicker starts in cold weather Connect the cord to a standard 110 115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded three wire extension cord The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine The engine block heater cord is located e 3 6L Engine coiled and strapped to the engine oil dipstick tube e 5 7L Engine bundled and fastened to the injector harness WARNING Remember to disconnect the engine block heater cord before driving Damage to the 110 115 Volt electrical cord could cause electrocution ee STARTING AND OPERATING 357 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION WARNING CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop e Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into PARK turn the engine OFF and remove the key fob When the ignition is in t
272. he sunroof will close fully and stop 258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Ss automatically This is called Express Close During Express Close operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Closing Sunroof Manual Mode To close the sunroof press and hold the switch in the forward position Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed condition until the switch is pushed and held forward again Opening Power Shade Express Press the shade switch rearward and release it within one half second and the shade will open automatically from any position The shade will open and stop automati cally at the half open position Press the shade switch rearward again and release it within one half second and the shade will open automatically to the full open position This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any movement of the shade switch will stop the shade Opening Power Shade Manual Mode To open the shade press and hold the switch rearward The shade will open and stop automatically at the half open position Press and hold the shade switch rearward again and the shade will open automatically to the full open position Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the shade will remain in a partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward again Closing Power Shade Express Press the sw
273. he time it takes to blink your eyes The air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the air bag In this way the air bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bag SAB Inflator Units The Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags are de signed to activate only in certain side collisions The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side air bags to inflate based on the severity and type of collision Based on the severity and type of collision the side air bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be triggered releasing a quantity of non toxic gas The inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door The SAB fully inflate in about 10 milliseconds The side air bag moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure you if you are not seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates This especially applies to children Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag Inflator Unit The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag unit is located in the instrument panel trim beneath the steering column When the ORC detects a collision requiring the air bag it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Supplemental
274. he vehicle speed goes above 20 mph 32 km h the HDC icon will flash and HDC will not function To disable HDC press the HDC switch 4WD Low Range Set Speeds e ist 6 mph 1 km h e 2nd 12 mph 2 km h e 3rd 4 mph 3 km h e 4th 2 5 mph 4 km h e 5th 3 1 mph 5 km h e 6th 3 7 mph 6 km h e 7th 4 3 mph 7 km h 408 STARTING AND OPERATING ME e 8th 5 mph 8 km h e REVERSE 6 mph 1 km h e NEUTRAL 1 2 mph 2 km h e PARK HDC remains enabled but not active HDC is intended for low speed off road driving only At vehicle speeds above 20 mph 32 km h HDC re mains enabled but does not function If the vehicle speed is maintained above 20mph for more than 70 seconds HDC will be disabled If the vehicle speed goes above 40mph then HDC will immediately disable When the vehicle speed drops below 20 mph 32 km h HDC function will automatically resume and the vehicle speed will return to the chosen set speed If the driver door is open the park brake is on or the vehicle is not in 4WD LOW range then HDC will be disabled WARNING HDC is only intended to assist the driver in control ling vehicle speed when descending hills The driver must remain attentive to the driving conditions and is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed Select Speed Control SSC Four Wheel Drive Models With MP3023 Two Speed Transfer Case Only SSC maintains vehicle speed during off road driving s
275. hild s knees bend comfortably over the front of the vehicle seat while they are still sitting all the way back 3 Does the shoulder belt cross the child s shoulder between their neck and arm 4 Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible touching the child s thighs and not their stomach 5 Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip If the answer to any of these questions was no then the child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle If the child is using the lap shoulder belt check belt fit peri odically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89 Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints Restraint Type Combined Weight of the Use any attachment method shown with an X Below LATCH Child Restraint 65 Ibs 29 5 kg Child Child LATEM Lower Anchors Seat Belt Top Restraint Lower oe Seat Belt Only Top Tether Tether Anchor omy Anchor Rear Facing Up to 65 lbs X X Child Restraint 29 5 kg Rear Facing More than X Child Restraint 65 lbs 29 5 kg Forward Facing Up to 65 Ibs X X Child Restraint 29 5 kg Forward Facing More than X 90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR
276. hrough the belt path of the child restraint Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Finally pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint while you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat 104 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee 5 If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether anchorage connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap Refer to Lower Anchors and Tethers for Chil dren LATCH Restraint System for directions to attach a tether anchor 6 Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path It should not move more than 1 inch 25 4 mm in any direction Any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too close to the belt path opening of the child restraint you may have trouble tightening the seat belt If this happens discon nect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt up to three full turns to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out away from the child restraint Repeat steps 4 to 6 above to complete the installation of the child restraint If the
277. ht position toward the rear of the vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while the small control under the mirror is set in the day position toward the windshield A Adjusting Rearview Mirror 030407085 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Sa Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle It is a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the wind shield The mirror installs on the windshield button with a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for mounting The mirror head can be adjusted up down left and right for various drivers The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you NOTE This feature is disabled when the vehicle is in reverse gear to improve rear view viewing 030471112 Automatic Dimming Mirror mmm N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 Outside Mirrors Outside Mirrors Folding Feature To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirrors All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight forward or rearward to resist damage The hinges have overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror three detent positions WARNING osx 3 e full rearward and Vehicles and other objects seen i
278. ht limit of the infant carrier Convertible child seats can be used either rearward facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old Children should remain rearward facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat WARNING e Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an air bag A deploying passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger including a child in a rearward facing infant seat Only use a rearward facing child restraint in a rear seat en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87 Older Children And Child Restraints Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear facing convertible child seat can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direc tion are for children who are over two years old or who have outgrown the rear facing weight or height limit of their rear facing convertible child seat Children should remain in a forward facing child seat with a harness for as long as possible up to the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat All children whose weight or he
279. ically have the radio set the time To change the Sync Time setting touch the Sync with GPS Time soft key until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Set Time Hours When in this display you may adjust the hours The Sync with GPS Time soft key must be unchecked To make your selection touch the or soft keys to adjust the hours up or down Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu or touch the X soft key to close out of the settings screen ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317 e Set Time Minutes When in this display you may adjust the minutes The Sync with GPS Time soft key must be unchecked To make your selection touch the or soft keys to adjust the minutes up or down Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu or touch the X soft key to close out of the settings screen e Time Format When in this display you may select the time format display setting Touch the Time Format soft key until a check mark appears next to the 12hrs or 24hrs setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Safety Assistance After pressing the Safety Assistance soft key the follow ing settings will be available e Front Collision Sensitivity If Equipped The Front Collision Warning FCW feature can be can be set to
280. iew Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a caution note to check entire surroundings across the top of the screen After five seconds this note will disappear The ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear License plate To make your selection touch the ParkView Backup Camera soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Rain Sensing Auto Wipers When this feature is selected the system will automati cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the windshield To make your selection touch the Rain Sensing soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Hill Start Assist If Equipped When this feature is selected the Hill Start Assist HSA system is active Refer to Electronic Brake Control System in Starting And Operating for system function and operating information To make your selection touch 320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M the Hill Start Assist soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the
281. if the light comes on again after initial startup It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is noted that could affect the air bag system The diagnos tics also record the nature of the malfunction WARNING Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the air bags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Inflator Units The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad vanced Front Air Bags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Air Bags Different air bag inflation rates ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 are possible based on several factors including the collision type and severity The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds This is about half of t
282. if you are taller than average you will prefer a higher position When you release the button verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched by pulling downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position NOTE The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is equipped with an Easy Up feature This feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward position without pushing the release button To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors ALR which are used to secure a child restraint system For additional information refer to Installing Child Re straints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt under the Child Restraints section The chart below defines the type of feature for each seating position Driver Center Passenger First Row N A N A ALR Second Row ALR ALR ALR N A Not Applicable e ALR Automatic Locking Retractor If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR and is being used for normal usage Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant s mid section so as to not activate the ALR If the ALR is activated you will hear a ratcheting sound as the belt retracts Allow the webbing 60
283. ight is above the forward facing limit for the child seat should use a belt positioning booster seat until the vehicle s seat belts fit properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seatback they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt WARNING Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the child restraint manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor ages or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or accident it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury 88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE xs Children Too Large For Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the seat belt in a rear seat Use this simple 5 step test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle s seat belt alone 1 Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the vehicle seat 2 Do the c
284. ill return to NRH Entry Exit Mode may be selected while the vehicle is not moving provided that the engine is still running and all doors remain closed ee STARTING AND OPERATING 385 e Transport Mode No indicator lamps will be illumi nated Customer driving will disable Transport Mode e Tire Jack Mode indicator lamps 3 and 6 will be illuminated Customer driving will disable Tire Jack Mode e Wheel Alignment Mode indicator lamps 3 and 4 will be illuminated Customer driving will disable Wheel Alignment Mode ON ROAD DRIVING TIPS Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a narrower track to make them capable of performing in a wide variety of off road applications Specific design characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than ordinary cars An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the road allowing you to anticipate problems They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional two wheel drive vehicles any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfacto rily in off road conditions If at all possible avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers As with other vehicles of this type failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover 386 STARTING AND OPERATING OFF ROAD DRIVING TIPS NOTE Prior to off road driving remove the front air dam to prevent damage The front air dam is attached to the
285. illed with diagrams charts and detailed illustrations These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled vehicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshoot ing and drivability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment Owner s Manuals These Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to ac quaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vehicles Included are starting operating emergency and mainte nance procedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips E F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 583 Call toll free at e 1 800 890 4038 U S e 1 800 387 1143 Canada Or Visit us on the Worldwide Web at e www techauthority com DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test cours
286. in if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph 9 km h ParkSense amp Sensors The four ParkSense sensors located in the rear fascia bumper monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors field of view The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 in 30 cm up to 79 in 200 cm from the rear fascia bumper in the horizontal direction depending on the location type and orienta tion of the obstacle ParkSense amp Warning Display The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if Sound and Display is selected from the Customer Programmable Features section of the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC or from the Uconnect System if available Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Program mable Features or Uconnect Settings if available in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information The ParkSense amp Warning screen is located within the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC It provides visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia bumper and the detected obstacle Refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further infor mation 220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Sx ParkSense Display The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing When the vehicle is in REVERSE the
287. in serious injury or death e Ina collision there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passen 034134074 gers are also properly secured Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof Never allow your fingers other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result Power Sunroof Switch 254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Opening Sunroof Express Press the switch rearward and release it within one half second and the sunroof will open automatically from any position The sunroof will open fully and stop automati cally This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Opening Sunroof Manual Mode To open the sunroof press and hold the switch rearward to full open Any release of the switch will stop the movement The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward again Closing Sunroof Express Press the switch forward and release it within one half second and the sunroof will close automatically from any position The sunroof will close fully and stop automati cally This is called Express Close During Express Close operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Clo
288. in the ACC or ON RUN position A child could operate power windows other con trols or move the vehicle This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter lock which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the engine can be turned off This helps the driver avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing the transmission in PARK This system also locks the transmission in PARK when Continued ever the ignition switch is in the OFF position ee STARTING AND OPERATING 359 Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System BTSI that holds the shift lever in PARK unless the brakes are applied To shift the transmission out of PARK the engine must be running and the brake pedal must be pressed The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds Fuel Economy ECO Mode The Fuel Economy ECO mode can improve the vehi cle s overall fuel economy during normal driving condi tions Press the eco switch in the center stack of the instrument panel and a green light will indicate the ECO mode is engaged Fuel Economy Mode Switch When the Fuel Economy ECO Mode is engaged the vehicle control systems will change the following e The transmission will upshift sooner and downshift later e The torque converter clutch may engage at lower engine s
289. independent temperature con trol Push the hard key button for cooler temperature settings or on the touch screen press and slide the soft key temperature bar towards the blue arrow soft key for cooler temperature settings NOTE In Sync mode this button will also automatically m adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time 14 Driver Temperature Control Up Button Provides the driver with independent temperature con trol Push the hard key button for warmer temperature settings or on the touch screen press and slide the soft key temperature bar towards the red arrow soft key for warmer temperature settings NOTE In Sync mode this button will also automatically adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time 338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss Climate Control Functions A C Air Conditioning The Air Conditioning A C button allows the operator to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning system When the air conditioning system is turned on cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into the cabin For improved fuel economy press the A C button to turn off the air conditioning and manually adjust the blower and airflow mode settings Also make sure to select only Panel Bi Level or Floor modes NOTE If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass select Defrost mode and increase blower speed If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expect
290. indicator will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency signal from the hand held transmitter Re lease both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to rapid At the garage door opener motor in the garage locate the LEARN or TRAINING button This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener device motor Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRAIN ING button On some garage door openers devices there may be a light that blinks when the garage door opener device is in the LEARN TRAIN mode NOTE You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the LEARN button has been pressed 6 Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink button twice holding the button for two seconds each time If the garage door opener device activates programming is complete NOTE If the garage door opener device does not acti vate press the button a third time for two seconds to complete the training To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels 248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps T 2 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begi
291. ined as the total weight of the vehicle with all fluids including vehicle fuel at full capacity conditions and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle The front and rear curb weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are added Loading The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer cial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then be determined separately to be sure that the load is properly distributed over the front and rear axle Weigh ing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the specified GVWR If so weight must be shifted from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the ee STARTING AND OPERATING 455 specified weight limitations are met Store the heavier TRAILER TOWING items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed In thi li fi f inf equally Stow all loose items securely before driving tiis section you will and Safely ups and inotmation on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully
292. inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential for side impact head injuries The SABIC deploy down ward covering both windows on the impact side N 1 022640121 Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Label Location en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 NOTE e e Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during air bag deployment Being too close to the SAB and SABIC air bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed Should a vehicle rollover occur the pretensioners and or SAB and SABIC air bags on both sides of the vehicle may deploy The system includes side impact sensors that are cali brated to deploy the Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags and SABIC air bags during impacts that require side air bag occupant protection WARNING Your vehicle is equipped with left and right SABIC do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the SABIC The area where the side curtain air bag is located should remain free from any obstructions Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the SAB the performance could be adversely affected and or objects could be pushed into you causing serious injury Your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags do not have any accessory items installed which will alter the roof including
293. ing When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck do not f you must use the accessories wipers defrosters etc attach to front or rear suspension components Dam while being towed the ignition must be in the ON RUN ageto your vehicle may result from improper towing position not the ACC position 504 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE Two Wheel Drive Models The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed If flatbed equipment is not available and the transmis sion is operable the vehicle may be towed with rear wheels on the ground under the following conditions e The transmission must be in NEUTRAL see Manual Park Release in this section for more information The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph 48 km h See Manual Park Release in this section for informa tion on shifting the transmission to NEUTRAL The towing distance must not exceed 30 miles 48 km If the transmission is not operable or the vehicle must be towed faster than 30 mph 48 km h or farther than 30 miles 48 km tow with the rear wheels OFF the ground Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or with the front wheels raised and the rear wheels on a towing dolly or when using a suitable steering wheel stabilizer to hold the front wheels in the straight position with the rear wheels raised and the front wheels on the ground CAUTION Towing this vehicle in violati
294. ing dust pollen and some odors Strong odors cannot be totally filtered out Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for filter replacement instruc tions UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343 Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS Hot weather and CUT RAN PUER e vehicle interior is very he mode contro to 5 on and blower on high Roll down the windows for a minute to flush out the hot air Once comfort is achieved adjust controls for comfort e Tum A C on and set the mode control to the position Cool Sunny Operate in Jf position Cool amp Humid conditions 9 06 e Set the mode control to d and tum on A C to keep 65656 es 66 c windows clear Set the mode control to the position If windshield Cold Weather fogging starts to occur move the control towards the We position 0456001003 STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS Bl STARTING PROCEDURES Bl AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Automatic Transmission Keyless Enter N Go 00 Normal Starting ds bees ee Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F Or 29 C 2 0 2 00050 If Engine Fails To Start sun Hl After Starting es rx ee rx ede e na E ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED 351 351 352 352 354 354 356 356 Key Ignition Park
295. ingle 1 2 Slow for rear Fast Continuous Chime Second Tone only for rear only Arcs None Ath Solid 3rd Solid 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing Radio Volume No Yes Yes Yes Yes NOTE ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio if on when the system is sounding an audio tone 234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Front Park Assist Audible Alerts ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist audible alert chime after approximately 3 seconds when an obstacle has been detected the vehicle is stationary and brake pedal is applied Adjustable Chime Volume Settings Front and Rear chime volume settings can be selected from the EVIC or Uconnect System if equipped If Uconnect System is equipped chime volume settings will not be accessible from the EVIC The chime volume settings include LOW MEDIUM and HIGH The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state through ignition cycles Enabling And Disabling ParkSense amp ParkSense amp can be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense switch Pya When the ParkSense switch is pressed to dis orr able the system the instrument cluster will dis play the PARKSENSE OFF message for ap proximately five seconds Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system is di
296. io antenna Do not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements When cleaning the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror 546 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft cloth Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage can also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use MOPAR Total Clean a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them Dry with a soft cloth Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly FUSES POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTER The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine compartment near the battery This center contains car tridge fuses micro fuses relays and circuit breakers A description of each fuse and component may be stamped on the inside cover otherwise the cavity num ber of each fuse is stamped on the inside cover
297. ion or personal injury FOUR WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION Quadra Trac I amp Operating Instructions Precautions If Equipped The Quadra Trac I is a single speed HI range only transfer case which provides convenient full time four wheel drive No driver interaction is required The Brake Traction Control BTC System which combines standard ABS and Traction Control provides resistance to any wheel that is slipping to allow additional torque transfer to wheels with traction NOTE The Quadra Trac I system is not appropriate for conditions where 4WD LOW range is recommended Refer to Off Road Driving Tips in Starting and Oper ating for further information 370 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Quadra Trac II Operating Instructions Precautions If Equipped The Quadra Trac II transfer case is fully automatic in the normal driving 4WD AUTO mode The Quadra Trac II amp transfer case provides three mode positions e 4WD HI NEUTRAL e 4WD LOW This transfer case is fully automatic in the 4WD HI mode When additional traction is required the 4WD LOW position can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts together and force the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed The 4WD LOW position is intended for loose slippery road surfaces only Driving in the 4WD LOW position on dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to driveline components When operating your vehicle
298. ir or service If s he cannot do so then the odometer must be set at zero and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was before the repair or service It is a good idea for you to make a record of the odometer reading before the repair service so that you can be sure that it is properly reset or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero When the appropriate conditions exist this display shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC messages Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center of your owners manual for more information 17 Selectable EVIC Menu This area of the cluster will display the EVIC selectable menu For further information refer to Electronic Ve hicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped of your owners manual for more information 18 Air Bag Warning Light e This light will turn on for four to eight seconds ry as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON RUN position If the light is either not on during starting stays on or turns on while driving have the system inspected at an autho rized dealer as soon as possible Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle of your owners manual for further information UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293 19 Vehicle Security Light This light will flash rapidly for approximately e 15 seconds when the vehicle th
299. ire special precautions All installations should be checked for possible in terference between the communications equip ment and the vehicle s electronic systems Chrysler Group LLC 14WK741 126 AB Jeep STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS AR Third Edition Printed in U S A
300. is compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to manually reset the compass When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display 326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss CAL until the compass is calibrated You may also calibrate the compass by pressing the ON soft key and completing one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally Audio After pressing the Audio soft key the following settings will be available e Balance Fade When in this display you may adjust the Balance and Fade settings e Equalizer When in this display you may adjust the Bass Mid and Treble settings Adjust the settings with the and setting soft keys or by selecting any point on the scale between the and soft keys Then touch the arrow back soft key NOTE Bass Mid Treble allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as touch directly on the desired setting e Speed Adjusted Volume This feature increases or decreases volume relative to vehicle speed To change the Speed Adjusted Volume touch the Off 1 2 or 3 soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key e Surround Sound This feature provides simulated surround sound mode To make your selection touch the Surround Sound soft key select On or Off followed by pressing the arrow
301. itch forward and release it within one half second and the shade will close automatically from ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259 any position The shade will close fully and stop auto matically This is called Express Close During Express Close operation any movement of the switch will stop the shade NOTE If the sunroof is open it will automatically close during the Sun Shade Express Close movement Closing Power Shade Manual Mode To close the shade press and hold the switch in the forward position Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the shade will remain in a partially closed condition until the switch is pushed and held forward again Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation If an ob struction in the path of the sunroof is detected the sunroof will automatically retract Remove the obstruc tion if this occurs Next press the switch forward and release to Express Close NOTE If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in Pinch Protect reversals the fourth close attempt will be a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open
302. ite telltales area on the right amber telltales in the middle and red telltales on the left EVIC Amber Telltales This area will show reconfigurable amber caution tell tales These telltales include Low Fuel Telltale When the fuel level reaches approximately 3 0 gal 11 0 L this light will turn on and remain on until fuel is added UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303 e Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator Se ae v3 This telltale will turn on to indicate the wind shield washer fluid is low e Transmission Temperature Warning Telltale fluid temperature is running hot This may occur with severe usage such as trailer towing If this telltale turns on safely pull over and stop the vehicle Then shift the transmission into NEU TRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off G This telltale indicates that the transmission 304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL e Service Forward Collision Warming This light warns the driver of a potential collision with the vehicle in front and prompts the driver to take action in order to avoid the collision For further information refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Under standing The Features Of Your Vehicle e Service Adaptive Cruise Control This light will turn on when a ACC is not operating and needs service For further informa tion refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle
303. ition NOTE To help control wind noise when the crossbars are not in use place the front and rear crossbars approxi mately 24 in 61 cm apart Optimal noise reduction can then be achieved by adjusting the front crossbar forward or aft using increments of 1 in 2 5 cm e If the rear crossbar or any metallic object is placed over the satellite radio antenna if equipped you may experience interruption of satellite radio reception For improved satellite radio reception avoid placing the rear crossbar over the satellite radio antenna e The grab handles on the back of the vehicle if equipped are not to be used as a towing feature 280 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se CAUTION To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle do not carry any loads on the roof rack without the crossbars installed The load should be secured and placed on top of the crossbars not directly on the roof If it is necessary to place the load on the roof place a blanket or some other protection between the load and the roof surface To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle do not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of 150 Ib 68 kg Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible and secure the load appropriately Long loads which extend over the windshield such as wood panels or surfboards or loads with large frontal area should be secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle Continued CAU
304. ition is cycled to OFF Opening either front door will cancel this feature To change the Engine Off Power Delay status touch the 0 seconds 45 seconds 5 minutes or 10 minutes soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key e Headlight Off Delay When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To change the Headlight Off Delay status touch the or soft key to select your desired time interval Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325 Compass Settings If Equipped After pressing the Compass Settings soft key the follow ing settings will be available e Variance Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To compensate for the differences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven per the zone map Once properly set the compass will automatically compensate for the differences and provide the most accurate compass heading NOTE Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the instrument panel such as iPod s Mobile Phones Laptops and Radar Detectors This is where the compass module is located and it can cause interference with the compass sensor and it may give false readings 040506040 Compass Variance Map e Perform Compass Calibration Touch the Calibration soft key to change this setting Th
305. itions temporarily limit system per formance This most often occurs at times of poor visibil ity such as in snow or heavy rain and fog The ACC system may also become temporarily blinded due to obstructions such as mud dirt or ice on windshield and fog on the inside of glass In these cases the EVIC will display ACC FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield and the system will have degraded perfor mance The ACC FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield message can sometimes be displayed while driving in highly reflective areas i e tunnels with reflec tive tiles or ice and snow The ACC FCW system will recover after the vehicle has left these areas Under rare conditions when the camera is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may temporarily occur If weather conditions are not a factor the driver should examine the windshield and the camera located on the back side of the inside rear view mirror They may require cleaning or removal of an obstruction When the condition that created limited functionality is no longer present the system will return to full function ality NOTE If the ACC FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield message occurs frequently e g more than once on every trip without any snow rain mud or other obstruction have the windshield and forward facing camera inspected at your authorized dealer EN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATU
306. its size and shape giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle 228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST IF EQUIPPED The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear and or front fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up or moving forward e g during a parking maneuver Refer to ParkSense System Usage Precautions for limi tations of this system and recommendations ParkSense will retain the last system state enabled or disabled from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON RUN position ParkSense can be active only when the shift lever is in REVERSE or DRIVE If ParkSense is enabled at one of these shift lever positions the system will remain active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph 11 km h or above The system will become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph 9 km h ParkSense Sensors The four ParkSense sensors located in the rear fascia bumper monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors field of view The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 in 30 cm up to 79 in 200 cm from the rear fascia bumper in the horizontal direction depending on the location type and orienta tion of the obstacle ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VE
307. ituations and is available in 4WD LOW range only To enable SSC press the SSC switch When SSC is enabled the SSC icon will be illuminated in the instru ment cluster SSC will automatically apply the brakes to control speed to the selected level when necessary ee STARTING AND OPERATING 409 The SSC speed may be adjusted by the driver to suit the 4WD Low Range Set Speeds driving conditions The speed corresponds to the trans _ mission gear selected SSC operation can be overridden Ist 6 mph Enh with brake application to slow the vehicle down below 2nd 1 2 mph 2 km h the SSC control speed Conversely if more speed is 7 desired during SSC control the accelerator pedal will oca eh increase vehicle speed in the usual manner When either e 4th 2 5 mph 4 km h the brake or the accelerator is released SSC will control E the vehicle back to the original set speed SRE oT phe neh e 6th 3 7 mph 6 km h SSC Operation In 4WD Low Range To enable SSC press the SSC switch The SSC icon willbe 7th 43 mph 7 km h illuminated in the instrument cluster and SSC will func e 8th 5 mph 8 km h tion If the vehicle speed goes above 20 mph 32 km h the SSC icon will flash and SSC will not function To REVERSE 6 mph 1 km h disable SSC press the SSC switch e NEUTRAL 1 2 mph 2 km h e PARK SSC remains enabled but not active 410 STARTING AND OPERATING ME SSC is intended for low speed off road driving
308. ivate the inside rearview mirror This camera detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches from high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view 1 Enable the Automatic High Beams through the Uconnect system screen Refer to Customer Pro grammable Features Uconnect Access 8 4 Settings jn Understanding Your Instrument Panel for fur NOTE ther information e If the windshield or automatic high beam mirror is 2 Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight replaced the automatic high beam mirror must be position re aimed to ensure proper performance See your local authorized dealer 3 Push the multifunction lever away from you toward front of vehicle to engage the high beam mode e Broken muddy or obstructed headlights and taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to remain on longer closer to the vehicle Also dirt film NOTE This system will not activate until the vehicle is at or above 20 mph 32 km h N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167 To Deactivate 1 Pull the multifunction lever toward you or rearward in car to manually deactivate the system normal operation of low beams 2 Push back on the multifunction lever once again to reactivate the system Daytime Running Lights If Equipped The Daytime Running Lights low intensity come on whenever the engine is running and the transmission is not in the PARK positio
309. ken to the dealer for service It is likely the vehicle has lost power steering assistance Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information EVIC in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information If the POWER STEERING SYSTEM OVER TEMP mes sage and an icon are displayed on the EVIC screen it indicates that extreme steering maneuvers may have occurred which caused an over temperature condition in the power steering system You will lose power steering assistance momentarily until the over temperature con dition no longer exists Once driving conditions are safe then pull over and let vehicle idle for a few moments until the light turns off Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information C STARTING AND OPERATING 393 NOTE e Even if power steering assistance is no longer opera tional it is still possible to steer the vehicle Under these conditions there will be a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers If the condition persists see your authorized dealer for service 5 7L Engine The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your
310. l you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is found on a plate located on the left front corner of the instrument panel pad visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield This number also is stamped into the right front body behind the right front seat Move the right front seat forward to allow better viewing of the stamped VIN This number also appears on the Automobile Infor mation Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle Save this label for a convenient record of your vehicle identification number and optional equipment VIN Location 010809610 INTRODUCTION 9 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS ce m Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death pm Right Front Body VIN Location NOTE It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS E ll A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS 14 To Arm TheSystem 00000008 21 Keyless Ignition Node KIN 14 To Disarm The System eors tat rarawa 21 Key Pobuteneu ae henge tet bath EE eas 15 Tamper Alert 0 0 Em E eee eee 22 Ignition Or Accessory On Message 16 Hi
311. l by one position down to a minimum of Park Mode or the lowest position allowed based on current conditions i e vehicle speed etc Automatic height changes will occur based on vehicle speed and the current vehicle height The indicator lamps and EVIC messages will operate the same for automatic changes and user requested changes e e Off Road 2 OR2 Indicator lamps 4 5 and 6 will be illuminated when the vehicle is in OR2 Off Road 1 OR1 Indicator lamps 4 and 5 will be illuminated when the vehicle is in ORI Normal Ride Height NRH Indicator lamp 4 will be illuminated when the vehicle is in this position Entry Exit Mode Indicator lamp 3 will be illumi nated when the vehicle is in Entry Exit Mode If Entry Exit Mode is requested while vehicle speed is between 15 mph 24 km h and 25 mph 40 km h indicator lamp 4 will remain on solid and indicator lamp 3 will flash as the system waits for the vehicle to reduce speed If vehicle speed is reduced to and kept below 15 mph 24 km h indicator lamp 4 will turn off and indicator lamp 3 will flash until Entry Exit Mode is achieved at which point indicator lamp 3 will go solid If during the height change to Entry Exit Mode the vehicle speed exceeds 15 mph 24 km h the height change will be paused until the vehicle speed either goes below 15 mph 24 km h and the height change continues to Entry Exit Mode or exceeds 25 mph 40 km h and the vehicle height w
312. ld cut the highway death toll by 10 000 or more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by two million annually In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt Always buckle up HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle s equipment The detailed index at the back of this Owner s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual INTRODUCTION 7 ELECTRONIC STABILITY e amp amp Hart C m 9 ei 3 5002 QE eC 2 E ea MA awo srake ENONEOL neaRwwoow ELECTRCALY MAKUGNIS REARFOGLAN ANDUFTGATE DEFROSTANO VENTLATNGFAN WNOOWLOCK THROTTLE FOURWNED WARNING PARKING E3 Gp qp A m eR A w e 9 Noc bh amp QA s O Q Rh hammer m d 8 Imm UE CUADAT ZUNTA DUDSD eee e c eme O EQ T iay 8 INTRODUCTION WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against oper ating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire Owners Manua
313. le the warning message will be deactivated N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215 NOTE The minimum speed for FCW activation is 5 mph 10 km h The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the course prediction This is expected and is a part of normal FCW activation and functionality WARNING Forward Collision Warning FCW is not intended to avoid a collision on its own nor can FCW detect every type of potential collision The driver has the responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via braking and steering Failure to follow this warning could lead to serious injury or death Turning FCW ON Or OFF NOTE The default status of FCW is On this allows the system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you The forward collision button is located on the switch panel below the Uconnect display To turn the FCW system OFF press the forward collision button once to turn the system OFF led turns on To turn the FCW system back ON press the forward collision button again to turn the system ON led turns off Changing the FCW status to Off prevents the system from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you Changing the Active Braking status to Off prevents the system from providing limited autonomous braking or additional brake support if the driver is no
314. le you should have the battery and charging system tested at your authorized dealer CAUTION Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough without engine operation the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud sand or snow it can often be moved using a rocking motion Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels Press and hold the lock button on the shift lever Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator NOTE Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph 8 km h or less Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for more than 2 seconds you must press the brake pedal to engage DRIVE or REVERSE Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or racing the engine EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 497 NOTE Press the ESC Off switch if necessary to place CAUTION the Electronic Stability Control ESC system in Partial Off mode before rocking the vehicle Refer to Elec e When rocking a stuck vehicle by shifting be tronic Brake Control in Starting And Operating fo
315. le is equipped with the Keyless Enter N Go feature refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further informa tion Keyless Ignition Node KIN This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push of a button as long as the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is in the passenger compartment The Keyless Ignition Node KIN has four operating positions three of which are labeled and will illuminate when in position The three positions are OFF ACC and ON RUN The fourth position is START during start RUN will illuminate NOTE In case the ignition switch does not change with the push of a button the RKE transmitter Key Fob may have a low or dead battery In this situation a back up method can be used to operate the ignition switch Put the nose side side opposite of the emergency key of the Key Fob against the ENGINE START STOP button and push to operate the ignition switch ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 7 START STOP OX ENGINE 0202001141 Keyless Ignition Node KIN Key Fob The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and an emergency key which stores in the rear of the Key Fob The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead The emergency key is also for locking the glove box You can keep the emergency key with you when v
316. le that has the booster remote positive post of the discharged vehicle battery let the engine idle a few minutes and then start 2 Connect the opposite end of the positive 4 jumper the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery cable to the positive post of the booster battery Once the engine is started remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence 3 Connect the negative end of the jumper cable to the negative post of the booster battery 6 Disconnect the negative jumper cable from the remote negative post of the discharged vehicle 4 Connect the opposite end of the negative jumper cable to the remote negative post of the vehicle with 7 Disconnect the negative end of the jumper cable the discharged battery from the negative post of the booster battery 8 Disconnect the opposite end of the positive jumper WARNING cable from the positive post of the booster battery Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the 9 Disconnect the positive end of the jumper cable discharged battery The resulting electrical spark from the remote positive post of the discharged could cause the battery to explode and could result in vehicle personal injury 10 Reinstall the protective cover over the remote posi tive 4 battery post of the discharged vehicle 496 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehic
317. lid Key Fob available in the same exterior zone refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further infor mation Press the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry aS RKE transmitter 3 If any doors are open close them To Disarm The System The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of the following methods e Press the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information e Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF position 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se NOTE The driver s door key cylinder and the liftgate button on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during power liftgate entry Pressing the liftgate button will not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm If someone enters the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any door the alarm will sound e When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed the interior power door lock switches will not unlock the doors The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the system will give you a false alarm If one of the previ ously described arming sequences has occurred the Vehicle Security Alarm will
318. lide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 If a child from 1 to 12 years old not in a rear facing child 5 If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be seat must ride in the front passenger seat move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint Refer to Child Restraints You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly 2 All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly 3 The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Air Bags room to inflate 4 Do not lean against the door or window If your vehicle has side air bags and deployment occurs the side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided under If You Need Assistance WARNING e Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the air bags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belts even though you have air bags e Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment could cause serious injury including death Air Bags need room to infla
319. ll with all four wheels turning against engine compression drag This will permit you to control the vehicle speed and direction When descending mountains or hills repeated braking can cause brake fade with loss of braking control Avoid repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmis sion whenever possible mEEE STARTING AND OPERATING 391 After Driving Off Road Off road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than does most on road driving After going off road it is always a good idea to check for damage That way you can get any problems taken care of right away and have your vehicle ready when you need it e e e Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle Check tires body structure steering suspension and exhaust system for damage Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as required Check threaded fasteners for looseness particularly on the chassis drivetrain components steering and sus pension Retighten them if required and torque to the values specified in the Service Manual Check for accumulations of plants or brush These things could be a fire hazard They might hide damage to fuel lines brake hoses axle pinion seals and propeller shafts e After extended operation in mud sand water or similar dirty conditions have the radiator fan brake rotors wheels brake linings and axle yokes inspected and cleaned
320. lle M A N T E N A N e I S e H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N ie E S Cc H E D U L E S 8 568 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES BEEN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change indicator system The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Based on engine operation conditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate This means that ser vice is required for your vehicle Operating conditions such as frequent short trips trailer tow extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures and E85 fuel usage will influence when the Oil Change Required message is displayed Severe Operating Conditions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as early as 3 500 miles 5 600 km since last reset Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Oil Change Required in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change inter vals exceed 10 000 miles 16 000 km or twelve months whichever
321. loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc Removing Slack From Belt 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle The belt will automatically retract to its stowed posi tion If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow it to retract fully 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap In the front seating positions the shoulder belt can be shoulder belt adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away from your neck Press the release button to release the anchorage and then move it up or down to the position 1 Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point 2 At about 6 to 12 in 15 to 30 cm above the latch plate grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate 3 Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate 4 Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and
322. lower front fascia with seven quarter turn fasteners and can be removed by hand The front license plate bracket must be removed first if equipped TABOO OOO IO Dai I a 405747079 XIAO SA Front Air Dam 1 Front Bumper 2 Front Air Dam Fasteners 053810760 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 387 Quadra Lift If Equipped When off roading it is recommended that the lowest useable vehicle height that will clear the current obstacle or terrain be selected The vehicle height should then be raised as required by the changes in terrain The Selec Terrain switch will automatically change the vehicle to the optimized height based on the Selec Terrain switch position The vehicle height can be changed from the default height for each Selec Terrain mode by normal use of the air suspension switches Refer to Quadra Lift If Equipped in Starting and Oper ating for further information When To Use 4WD LOW Range If Equipped When off road driving shift to 4WD LOW for additional traction This range should be limited to extreme situa tions such as deep snow mud or sand where additional low speed pulling power is needed Vehicle speeds in excess of 25 mph 40 km h should be avoided when in 4WD LOW range WARNING Do not drive in 4WD LOW Range on dry pavement driveline damage may result 4WD LOW Range locks front and rear drivelines together and does not allow for differential action be
323. ls Without pressing the brake pedal push the ENGINE START STOP button and cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position Do not start the engine Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer ences i e seat side mirror power tilt and telescopic steering column if equipped and radio station pre sets Press and release the S Set button on the memory switch Within 5 seconds press and release either of the memory buttons 1 or 2 The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display which memory position has been set Vehicles Not Equipped With Keyless Enter N Go 1 Insert the ignition key fob and turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer ences ie seat side mirror adjustable pedals if equipped power tilt and telescopic steering column if equipped and radio station presets Press and release the S Set button on the memory switch 4 Within 5 seconds press and release either of the memory buttons 1 or 2 The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display which memory position has been set NOTE e Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in PARK but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a memory profile ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 The Recall Memory with Remote Linked to Memory feature can be enabled through the Uconnect system screen Refer to
324. ly the bracket back to the beam is 6 6 ft Ibs 9 N m 206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Service ACC FCW Warning If the system turns off and the EVIC displays ACC FCW Unavailable Service Required or Cruise FCW Unavail able Service Required there may be an internal system fault or a temporary malfunction that limits ACC function ality Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions ACC will be temporarily unavailable If this occurs try activating ACC again later following a key cycle If the problem persists see your authorized dealer Precautions While Driving With ACC In certain driving situations ACC may have detection issues In these cases ACC may brake late or unexpectedly The driver needs to stay alert and may need to intervene Towing A Trailer NOTE Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC Offset Driving ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is Offset from your direct line of travel or a vehicle merging in from a side lane There may not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead The offset vehicle may move in and out of the line of travel which can cause your vehicle to brake or accelerate unexpectedly 032400170 Hn UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207 Turns And Bends When driving on a curve with ACC engaged the system may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for stability reasons with no target vehicle detected
325. me the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one indicating the change The LOW level setting will turn OFF automatically after approximately 45 min utes Front Ventilated Seats With Uconnect 8 4 8 4A If Equipped On some models both the driver and passenger seats are ventilated Located in the seat cushion and seatback are small fans that draw the air from the passenger compart ment and pull air through fine perforations in the seat cover to help keep the driver and front passenger cooler in higher ambient temperatures To operate the system press the Controls soft key located on the bottom of the Uconnect display Press the Driver or Passenger seat soft key once to select HI level ventilation Press the soft key a second time to select LO level ventilation Press the soft key a third time to shut off the seat ventilation NOTE The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to operate Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start On models that are equipped with remote start the driver s ventilated seat can be programmed to come on during a remote start Refer to Remote Starting Sys tem If Equipped in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Head Restraints Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact Head restraints should be adjusted s
326. measure Touch US or Metric until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Voice Response Length When in this display you may change the Voice Re sponse Length settings To change the Voice Response Length touch the Brief or Detailed soft key until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu 316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME e Touchscreen Beep When in this display you may turn on or shut off the sound heard when a touch screen button soft key is pressed Touch the Touchscreen Beep soft key until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Navigation Turn By Turn In Cluster If Equipped When this feature is selected the turn by turn directions will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route To make your selection touch the Navigation Turn By Turn In Cluster soft key until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Clock After pressing the Clock soft key the following settings will be available e Sync Time With GPS When in this display you may automat
327. mirrors will move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE To make your selection touch the Tilt Mirrors In Reverse soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Blind Spot Alert When this feature is selected the Blind Spot Alert feature can be set to Off Lights or Lights and Chime The Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in Lights mode When this mode is selected the Blind Spot Monitor BSM system is activated and will only show a visual alert in the outside mirrors When Lights amp Chime mode is activated the Blind Spot Monitor BSM will show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn signal is on When Off is selected the Blind Spot Monitor BSM system is deacti vated To change the Blind Spot Alert status touch the Off Lights or Lights amp Chime soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319 NOTE If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located even if the fascia is not damaged the sensor may have become misaligned Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment Having a sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to specification e ParkView Backup Camera Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkV
328. mit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addi tion certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemi cals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION See the Warranty Information Booklet located on the DVD for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market en F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 581 MOPAR PARTS MOPAR fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from an authorized dealer They are recom mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In The 50 United States And Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY
329. mited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning This feature remains active even if ESC system is in the Partial Off mode Refer to Elec tronic Stability Control ESC in this section for further information Brake Assist System BAS The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers The system detects an emergency braking situation by sens ing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances The BAS complements the anti lock brake system ABS Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefit of the system you must apply continuous brak ing pressure during the stopping sequence do not pump the brakes Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated WARNING e The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys ics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions The BAS cannot prevent collisions including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery sur
330. mium Park Turn Signal Lamp LED Service at Authorized Dealer Rear Body Side Turn Stop Lamps 3157 P27 7W Daytime Running Lamp DRL 3157K Rear Body Side Tail Lamps LED Service at Premium Daytime Running LED Service at uthorized Dealer Lamp DRL Authorized Dealer CHMSL Center High LED Service at Front Fog Lamps PSX24W Mounted Stop Lamp uthorized Dealer Front Side Marker W5W NOTE Premium Front Side Marker LED Service at Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be Authorized Dealer purchased from your authorized dealer Front Park Turn Lamp T20 If a bulb needs to be replaced visit your authorized Body Side Turn Signal Lamps 7440NA WY21W dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 557 BULB REPLACEMENT High Intensity Discharge Headlamps HID If Equipped The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the headlamp switch off and the key removed Because of this you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb yourself If a headlamp bulb fails take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for service WARNING A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of High Intensity Discharge HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned ON It may cause serious electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced prop erly See your authorized d
331. mmended transmission fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 539 Maintaining Your Vehicle for fluid specifications It is important to maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level using the recommended fluid NOTE No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission only the approved lubricant should be used CAUTION Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac turer s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for fluid speci fications Special Additives The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any special additives in the transmission Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supple mental additives Therefore do not add any fluid addi tives to the transmission The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks Avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission compo nents Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty 540 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Fluid Level Check The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require adjustment under normal
332. more once you turn ParkSense off it remains off until you turn it on again even if you cycle the ignition key When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE position and ParkSense is turned OFF the EVIC will display PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE 226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se e e ParkSense when on will reduce the volume of the radio when it is sounding a tone Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly taking care not to scratch or damage them The sensors must not be covered with ice snow slush mud dirt or debris Failure to do so can result in the system not working properly The ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle behind the fascia bumper or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia bumper Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense system OFF if objects such as bicycle carriers trailer hitches etc are placed within 12 in 30 cm from the rear fascia bumper Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem causing the PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED message to be displayed in the EVIC On vehicles equipped with a tailgate ParkSense should be disabled when the tailgate is in the lowered or open position and the vehicle is in REVERSE A lowered tailgate could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle CA
333. n The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited how ever the driver can always apply the brakes manually if necessary NOTE The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC system applies the brakes A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain the set distance If this occurs a visual alert 200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se BRAKE will flash in the EVIC and a chime will sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking capacity 0323001258 Brake Alert When this occurs you should immediately apply the brakes as needed to maintain a safe distance from the vehicle ahead Overtake Aid When driving with ACC engaged and following a target vehicle the system will provide an additional accelera tion to assist in passing vehicles in front This additional acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes the left turn signal In locations with left hand drive traffic Overtake Aid is active only when passing on the left hand side of the Target vehicles When a vehicle goes from a location with left hand drive traffic to a location with right hand drive traffic the ACC system will automatically detect traffic direction In this condition Overtake Aid is active only when passing on the right side of the Target vehicle This additional acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes the right turn signal In this conditi
334. n The lights will remain on until the ignition is switched to the OFF or ACC position or the parking brake is engaged The headlight switch must be used for normal nighttime driving NOTE The Daytime Running Lights will turn off auto matically when a turn signal is in operation and turn on again when the turn signal is not operating Automatic Headlight Leveling HID Headlights Only This feature prevents the headlights from interfering with the vision of oncoming drivers Headlight leveling automatically adjusts the height of the headlight beam in reaction to changes in vehicle pitch Adaptive Bi Xenon High Intensity Discharge Headlights If Equipped This system automatically swivels the headlight beam pattern horizontally to provide increased illumination in the direction the vehicle is steering NOTE Each time the Adaptive Headlight System is turned on the headlights will initialize by performing a brief sequence of rotations The Adaptive Headlight System is active only when the vehicle is moving forward 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The Adaptive Headlight System can be turned On or Off using the Uconnect System refer to Uconnect Set tings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Headlight Delay To aid in your exit your vehicle is equipped with a headlight delay that will leave the headlights on for approximately 90 seconds This delay is initia
335. n d normal if the light stays on through several of your typical Operating conditions This can cause a fire if you driving cycles In most situations the vehicle will drive drive slowly or park over flammable substances such normally and will not require towing as dry plants wood cardboard etc This could result in death or serious injury to the driver occupants or others CAUTION Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator 11 Electronic Park Brake Failure Indicator If Equipped Light MIL on could cause damage to the engine drivability If the MIL is flashing severe catalytic Brake system requires service converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required control system It also could affect fuel economy and Q This light indicates the Electronic Parking e 288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss 12 Engine Temperature Indicator This light warns of an overheated engine condi tion As temperatures rise and the gauge ap proaches H this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H the indicator will continuously flash and a continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool If the light turns on while driving safely pull over and stop the vehicle If the A C system is on turn it off Also shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve hi
336. n the Uconnect system screen me Uconnect 8 4 Automatic Temperature Controls Soft keys UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333 Button Descriptions Applies To Both Hard keys And Soft keys 1 MAX AIC Button Press and release to change the current setting the indicator illuminates when MAX A C is ON Performing this function again will cause the MAX A C operation to switch into manual mode and the MAX A C indicator will turn off 2 AIC Button Press and release to change the current setting the indicator illuminates when A C is ON Performing this function again will cause the A C operation to switch into manual mode and the A C indicator will turn off 3 Recirculation Button Press and release to change the current setting the indicator illuminates when ON 334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss 4 AUTO Operation Button Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch between manual mode and automatic modes Refer to Automatic Operation for more information 5 Front Defrost Button Press and release to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode The indicator illuminates when this fea ture is ON Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode The blower speed may increase when Defrost mode is selected If the front defrost mode is turned off the clima
337. n the left side of the Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows steering column on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights NOTE If either light remains on and does not flash or there is a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective Lane Change Assist Tap the lever up or down once without moving beyond the detent and the turn signal right or left will flash three times then automatically turn off 031563090 Multifunction Lever 174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Flash To Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steer ing wheel This will cause the high beam headlights to turn on until the lever is released High Low Beam Switch Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument panel to switch the headlights to high beam Pulling the multifunction back toward the steering wheel will turn the low beams back on or shut the high beams off WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS The windshield wiper washer controls are located on the multifunction lever on the left side of the steering col umn The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch located on the end of the lever For information on the rear wiper washer refe
338. n the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your Power Folding Outside Mirrors If Equipped passenger side convex mirror could cause you to e normal If equipped with power folding mirrors they can be electrically folded rearward and unfolded into the drive collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a position vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror Some vehicles will not have a convex passenger side mirror The switch for the power folding mirrors is located between the power mirror switches L left and R right Press the switch once and the mirrors will fold in press the switch a second time and the mirrors will return to the normal driving position 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se If the mirror is manually folded after electrically cycled Power Mirrors a potential extra button push is required to get the mirrors back to the home position If the mirror does not electrically fold check for ice or dirt build up at the pivot area which can cause excessive drag The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but tons and a four way mirror control switch To adjust a mirror press the mirror select button for the mirror that you want to adjust Using the mirror control switch press on any of the four arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move
339. n you need it You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to protect you Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper vehicle body structure or add aftermarket side steps or running boards e It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system Continued WARNING Continued Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag system The air bag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag system service If your seat including your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way including removal or loosening tightening of seat attachment bolts take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons with dis abilities contact your authorized dealer 82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Air Bag Warning Light You will want to have the air bags ready to inflate for your protection in a collision The Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with air bag system electrical compone
340. nd foot or loose cargo To avoid accidental deployment of the Active Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured as loose cargo could contact the Active Head Restraint during sudden stops Failure to follow this warning could cause personal injury if the Active Head Restraint is deployed Head Restraints Rear Seats The head restraints on the outboard seats are not adjust able They automatically fold forward when the rear seat is folded to a load floor position but do not return to their normal position when the rear seat is raised After Rear Head Restraint returning either seat to its upright position raise the head restraint until it locks in place The outboard headrests are not removable 030933142 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and WARNING positioned forward This will allow the rear seatback to Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its lowered fold down easily position could result in serious injury or death in a 1 Pull upward on the release lever to release the seat collision Always make sure the outboard head re straints are in their upright positions when the seat is to be occupied NOTE For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether refer to Occupant Restraints in Things to Know Before Start ing Your Vehicle for further information 60 40 Split Rear Seat To Lower Rear Seat Either side of the rear se
341. ndow completely and continue to hold the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed 2 Push the window switch down firmly to the second detent to open the window completely and continue to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after the window is fully open Window Lockout Button The Window Lockout button on the driver s door allows you to disable the window controls on the rear doors To disable the window controls on the rear doors press the Window Lockout button To enable the window controls press the Window Lockout button again Window Lockout Button Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sun roof opening to minimize the buffeting LIFTGATE To Unlock Enter The Liftgate The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is built into the electronic liftgate handle With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft 1 0 m of the liftgate press the electronic liftgate handle to o
342. ne is at idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal 352 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Using Fob With Integrated Key Tip Start NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal Do not press the accelerator Use the Fob with Integrated Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will continue to run and it will disengage automatically when the engine is running If the engine fails to start the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds If this occurs turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure Keyless Enter N Go This feature allows the driver to oper ate the ignition switch with the push of a button as long as the Remote Start Keyless Enter N Go FOBIK is in the passenger compartment Normal Starting Using The ENGINE START STOP Button 1 The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL 2 Press and hold the brake pedal while pressing the ENGINE START STOP button once ee STARTING AND OPERATING 353 3 The system takes over and attempts to start the vehicle If the vehicle fails to start the starter will disengage automatically after 10 seconds 4 If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to the engine starting press the
343. ne of five settings to activate this feature The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the multifunction lever Wiper delay position 1 is the least sensitive and wiper delay position 5 is the most sensi tive Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less wiper sensitivity Setting 5 can be used if the driver desires more sensitivity Place the wiper switch in the OFF position when not using the system NOTE The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the wiper switch is in the low or high speed position The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly when ice or dried salt water is present on the windshield Use of Rain X or products containing wax or silicone may reduce Rain Sensing performance A customer programmable feature in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC allows the Rain Sensing feature to be turned off Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understand ing Your Instrument Panel for further information The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the wiper blades and arms and will not operate under the following conditions Low Ambient Temperature When the ignition is first turned ON the Rain Sensing system will not operate until the wiper switch is moved vehicle speed is greater than 0 mph 0 km h or the outside tem perat
344. neral Information e ange ns 210 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 FORWARD COLLISION WARNING FCW WITH MITIGATION IF EQUIPPED ll PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST IF EQUIPPED ParkSense Sensors ParkSense Warning Display ParkSense Display Enabling And Disabling ParkSense Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist Cleaning The ParkSense System ParkSense System Usage Precautions Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control Mode 210 Hl PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST IF EQUIPPED ParkSense Sensors ParkSense Warning Display ParkSense Display lesen Enabling And Disabling ParkSense Service The ParkSense Park Assist System Cleaning The ParkSense System ParkSense System Usage Precautions ll PARKVIEWG REAR BACK UP CAMERA IF EQUIPPED Turning ParkView On Or Off With Uconnect8 5 0 lesen 235 240 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Turning ParkView On Or Off With Uconnect SA 8AA s carran ra eneke E 241 E OVERHEAD CONSOLE oases 6 Rhe 241 Front Map Reading Lights 242 Courtesy Lights llle 243 Sunglasses Bin Door 00 243 ll GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED 244
345. nflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section of this manual NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to Vehicle Loading in this section ee STARTING AND OPERATING 419 To determine the maximum loading conditions of your 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XX
346. nformation Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted condition the EVIC will display the PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS or PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE Under this condition ParkSense will not operate ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225 If PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC make sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia bumper is clean and clear of snow ice mud dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition If the message continues to appear see an authorized dealer If PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED appears in the EVIC see an authorized dealer Cleaning The ParkSense amp System Clean the ParkSense sensors with water car wash soap and a soft cloth Do not use rough or hard cloths Do not scratch or poke the sensors Otherwise you could dam age the sensors ParkSense System Usage Precautions NOTE e Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow ice mud dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system oper ating properly Jackhammers large trucks and other vibrations could affect the performance of ParkSense e When you turn ParkSense OFF the instrument clus ter will display PARKSENSE OFF Further
347. nic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information 4WD LOW To 4WD HI With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph 0 to 5 km h the ignition switch in the ON position or the engine running shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and press the AWD LOW button once on the transfer case switch The AWD LOW indicator light in the instrument cluster will flash and go out when the shift is complete e If shift conditions interlocks are not met or a transfer case motor temperature protection condition exists a For 4x4 High Slow Below 3 MPH or 5 KPH Put Trans in N Press 4 Low message will flash from the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information e Shifting into or out of WD LOW is possible with the vehicle completely stopped however difficulty may occur due to the mating clutch teeth not being prop erly aligned Several attempts may be required for clutch teeth alignment and shift completion to occur The preferred method is with the vehicle rolling 0 to 3 mph 0 to 5 km h If the vehicle is moving faster than 3 mph 5 km h the transfer case will not allow the shift 374 STARTING AND OPERATING NEUTRAL Shift Procedure will display on the EVIC Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Cen
348. nic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information Modes Of Operation With Uconnect amp System If Equipped Three selectable modes of operation are available in the Uconnect system screen Refer to Customer Program mable Features Uconnect Access 8 4 Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 Blind Spot Alert When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object However when the system is operating in RCP the system will respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present Whenever an audible alert is requested the radio is muted Blind Spot Alert Lights Chime When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights Chime mode the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro priate side view mirror based on a detected object If the turn signal is then activated and it corresponds to an alert present on that side of the vehicle an audible chime will also be sounded Whenever a turn signal and detected object are present on the same side at the same time both the visual and audio alerts will be issued In addition to the audible alert the radio if on will also be muted NOTE Whenever an audible alert is
349. njured by these fumes Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle If you are required to drive with the liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control blower switch is set at high speed Do not use the recirculation mode A OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems Three point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and all passengers Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passenger Supplemental Active Head Restraints AHR located on top of the front seats integrated into the head restraint Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC for the driver and passengers seated next to a window Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 An energy absorbing steering column and steering wheel Knee bolsters for front seat occupants Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may enhance occupant protection by managing occupant energy during an impact event All seat belt systems except the driver s and second row center include Automatic Locking Retractors ALRs which lock the seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt all the way out and then adjust ing the belt to the desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large item in a seat if equipped Please pay close attention
350. ns 416 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 417 348 STARTING AND OPERATING ME ll TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION 422 Tire Spinning 22 ek em head 429 Tire PresSsute neuere tard 4 ys e pom os 422 Tread Wear Indicators 0 0 430 Tire Inflation Pressures 0 423 Lite Of TITE bitin oy bute ears IDEE MESS SS 430 Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation 425 Replacement Tires 000006 431 Radial Ply Tires 050 425 W TIRE CHAINS TRACTION DEVICES 433 All Season Tires If Equipped 426 WM TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS 434 Summer Or Three Season Tires If Equipped 426 Wi TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS 435 Snow Tires eig iege d ed eee hd 426 Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire Warnings a5 603 069 63 baa Daman ec d 438 And Wheel If Equipped 427 SERVICE TPM SYSTEM Warning 439 Compact Spare Tire If Equipped 427 General Information 441 Full Size Spare If Equipped 428 B FUEL REQUIREMENTS 442 Limited Use Spare If Equipped 428 3 6L Engine If Equipped 442 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 349
351. ns to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming A Rolling Code Step 2 and follow all remaining steps Programming A Non Rolling Code For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured before 1995 1 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position 2 Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 in 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink button you want to program and the hand held trans mitter button Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi cator light HomeLink indicator will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency signal from the hand held transmitter Re lease both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to rapid Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button and observe the indicator light If the indicator light stays on constantly program ming is complete and the garage door device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249 To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Cycle the ignition to th
352. nsmission as the vehicle is accelerated You can start out from a stop in first or second gear or third gear in 4LO range Snow mode or Sand mode Tapping at a stop will allow starting in second gear Starting out in second gear is helpful in snowy or icy conditions If a requested downshift would cause the engine to over speed that shift will not occur The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle speed Holding the paddle depressed will progressively downshift the transmission to the lowest gear possible at the current speed Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when Paddle Shift mode is engaged The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a fault or overheat condition is detected NOTE When Selec Speed or Hill Descent Control is enabled Paddle Shift mode is not active Pressing the shift paddles in Selec Speed or Hill Descent Control simply limits the highest allowed gear Shifts below and up to that gear will occur automatically ee STARTING AND OPERATING 369 To disengage Paddle Shift mode press and hold the shift paddle until D or S is once again displayed in the instrument cluster You can shift in or out of Paddle Shift mode at any time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal WARNING Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid causing a collis
353. nternet at www HomeLink com for safety information or assistance Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a dan gerous gas Do not run your vehicle in the garage while programming the transceiver Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry Canada RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 2 This device may not cause harmful interference This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause unde sired operation NOTE The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications not ex pressly approved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to operate the device The term IC before the certification registration num ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical speci fications were met EN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253 POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED WARNING The power sunroof switch is located between the sun visors r the overhead console e Never leave children unattended in a vehicle and do not leave the key in the ignition switch or leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON Run position Occupants particularly unattended children can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrap ment may result
354. nts While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance free If any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately e ry e The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the four to eight seconds when the ignition is first cycled to the ON RUN The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight second interval e The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving NOTE If the speedometer tachometer or any engine related gauges are not working the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC may also be disabled The air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection Promptly check the fuse block for blown fuses Refer to Fuses in Maintaining Your Vehicle for the proper air bag fuses See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good Event Data Recorder EDR This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder EDR The main purpose of an EDR is to record in certain crash or near crash like situations such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle s systems per formed The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83 time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as How various systems in your vehicle were opera
355. o that the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear WARNING The head restraints for all occupants must be prop erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu pying a seat Head restraints should never be ad justed while the vehicle is in motion Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision Active Head Restraints Front Seats Active Head Restraints are passive deployable compo nents and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily identified by any markings only through visual inspec tion of the head restraint The head restraint will be split in two halves with the front half being soft foam and trim the back half being decorative plastic When AHRs deploy during a rear impact the front half of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap between the back of the occupant s head and the AHR This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in certain types of rear impacts Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted restraint To lower the head restraint press the push forward and rearward To tilt the head restrain
356. o the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage Forward facing child restraints and some rear facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is attached to the anchorage Center Seat LATCH Second Row 60 40 Do not install a child restraint in the center position using the LATCH system Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a child seat in the center seating position WARNING Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more than one child restraint Please refer to Installing The LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System for typical installation instructions Always follow the directions of the child restraint manu facturer when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here Vehicles With A Center Arm Rest Tether For rearward facing infant seats secured in the center seat position with the vehicle seat belts the rear center seat position has an armrest tether that secures the arm rest in the upward position THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97 1 To access the center seat arm rest tether first lower the 3 Raise the armrest and attach the tether hook to the arm rest The tether is located behind the armrest and strap located on the front of the arm rest hooked onto the plas
357. o the previous menu 322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e Sound Horn With Lock When this feature is selected the horn will sound when the door locks are activated To make your selection touch the Sound Horn With Lock soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Sound Horn With Remote Start When this feature is selected the horn will sound when the remote start is activated To make your selection touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks When 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter UNLOCK button When 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected you must press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger s doors When Unlock All Doors On 1st Press is selected all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button NOTE If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped If 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is programmed only the driver s door will unlock when the driver s door is gras
358. obstacles such as large rocks deep ruts etc If equipped with air suspension the vehicle level will change to Off Road 2 If the Selec Terrain switch is in ROCK mode and the transfer case is switched from 4WD Low to 4WD High the Selec Terrain system will return to AUTO 378 STARTING AND OPERATING Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display Messages When the appropriate conditions exist a message will appear in the EVIC display Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information QUADRA LIFT IF EQUIPPED Description The Quadra Lift air suspension system provides full time load leveling capability along with the benefit of vehicle height adjustment by the push of a button 0582003300 Selec Terrain Switch 1 Up Button 2 Down Button 3 Entry Exit Mode Indicator Lamp 4 Normal Ride Height Indicator Lamp 5 Off Road 1 Indicator Lamp 6 Off Road 2 Indicator Lamp ee STARTING AND OPERATING 379 e Normal Ride Height NRH This is the standard position of the suspension and is meant for normal driving Off Road 1 OR1 Raises the vehicle approximately 1 3 in 33 mm This is the primary position for all off road driving until OR2 is needed A smoother and more comfortable ride will result Press the Up button once from the NRH position while the vehicle speed is below 38 mph 61 km h When in
359. of 87 or E 85 056502430 fuel or any mixture of these two fuels E 85 Badge 448 STARTING AND OPERATING ME For best results a refueling pattern that avoids alternating between E 85 and unleaded gasoline is recommended When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that e you do not add less than 5 gallons 19 Liters when refueling you drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at least 5 miles 8 km Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard starting and or significant deterioration in driveability during warm up NOTE Use seasonally adjusted E 85 fuel ASTM D5798 With non seasonally adjusted E 85 fuel you may experience hard starting and rough idle following start up even if the above recommendations are followed especially when the ambient temperature is below 32 F 0 C e Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully compatible with E 85 and may form deposits in your engine To eliminate driveability issues that may be caused by these deposits a supplemental gasoline addi tive such as MOPAR Injector Cleanup or Techron may be used Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles E 85 And Gasoline Vehicles FFV vehicles operated on E 85 require specially formu lated engine oils These special requirements are included in MOPAR engine oils and in equivalent oils meeting Chrysler Specification MS 6395 The manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certifi
360. on Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions STARTING AND OPERATING 411 NOTE TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light Tire Markings and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momen tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation D var rg v NOUS The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the AE R Electronic Stability Control ESC is off OFF 1 US DOT Safety Standards 4 Maximum Load Code TIN 5 Maximum Pressure 2 Size Designation 6 Treadwear Traction and 3 Service Description Temperature Grades 412 STARTING AND OPERATING EE NOTE e e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example P215 65R15 95H European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width
361. on of the above require ments can cause severe transmission damage Dam age from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty EE WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 505 Four Wheel Drive Models Vehicles equipped with a single speed transfer case have no NEUTRAL position and therefore must be towed i ith all wheel The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels with all feat wheels OFF the gound OFF the ground Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of vehicle raised and the opposite end on a towing dolly If flatbed equipment is not available and the transfer Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used Internal case is operable vehicles with a two speed transfer case damage to the transmission or transfer case will may be towed in the forward direction with ALL wheels occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when on the ground IF the transfer case is in NEUTRAL N towing and the transmission is in PARK Refer to Recreational Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re Towing in Starting And Operating for detailed in quirements can cause severe transmission and or structions transfer case damage Damage from improper tow ing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS E ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3 6L 509 E ENGINE COMPARTMENT 5 7L 510 E ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II
362. on the ACC system will no longer provide Overtake Aid on the left side until it determines that the vehicle has moved back to a location with left hand drive traffic ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201 Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Menu The EVIC displays the current ACC system settings The EVIC is located in the center of the instrument cluster The information it displays depends on ACC system status Press the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL ACC ON OFF button located on the steering wheel until one of the following displays in the EVIC Adaptive Cruise Control Off When ACC is deactivated the display will read Adap tive Cruise Control Off Adaptive Cruise Control Ready When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has not been selected the display will read Adaptive Cruise Control Ready Press the SET or the SET button located on the steering wheel and the following will display in the EVIC ACC SET When ACC is set the set speed will continue to display in the lower right hand corner of the cluster The ACC screen will display once again if any ACC activity occurs which may include any of the following Distance Setting Change e System Cancel e Driver Override System Off e ACC Proximity Warning e ACC Unavailable Warning e The EVIC will return to the last display selected after five seconds of no ACC display activity 202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Ss
363. onditions 1 A weak battery in the RKE transmitter The expected life of the battery is a minimum of three years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter and some mobile or CB radios REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry C RKE transmitter to start the engine conve niently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security The system has a range of approximately 300 ft 91 m ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 NOTE e RKE PANIC button not pressed e The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic e Fuel meets minimum requirement Beara te Ve CaMipp ean Pepe sete e System not disabled from previous remote start event 2 e Obstructions between the vehicle and the RKE trans mitter may reduce this range How To Use Remote Start WARNING All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start e Vehicle theft alarm not active Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon e Shift lever in PARK oxide CO which is odorless and colorless Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious in Doors closed jury or death when inhaled e Hood closed Keep Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitters away from children Operation of the Remote Start HAZARD switch off System windows door locks or other controls e BRAKE switch inactive
364. only At vehicle speeds above 20 mph 32 km h SSC remains enabled but does not function If the vehicle speed is maintained above 20mph for more than 70 seconds SSC will be disabled If the vehicle speed goes above 40mph then SSC will immediately disable When the vehicle speed drops below 20 mph 32 km h SSC function will automatically resume and the vehicle speed will return to the chosen set speed If the driver door is open the park brake is on or the vehicle is not in 4WD Low then SSC will be disabled ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator ES Light in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position It should go out with the engine running If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your autho rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light lo cated in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active If the ESC Activati
365. ont Map Reading Lights 171 Rain sensig Wipers I Equip pe een map ra ds E TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN 179 Courtesy Lights isse enn 172 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME ll POWER TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN IF EQUIPPED 180 E HEATED STEERING WHEEL IF EQUIPPED 182 ll ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL TE EQUIPPED paea Sop RIS pew 184 lo Actyate daba edie wad stain Pet 185 To Set A Desired Speed 0 0 185 To Deactivate sans s eg aa eo atia 186 To Resume Speed 000000 186 To Vary The Speed Setting 186 To Accelerate For Passing 187 ll ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL ACC IF EQUIPPED 3 05 ove Re Re EI RA ELS 188 Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Operation 190 Activating Adaptive Cruise Control ACC 191 TO Actvale os oes ever ERR ERES 192 To Set A Desired ACC Speed 193 ToCanceli see es 194 TO Turn Offzc eus 964 49 294 Piris S 194 To Resume 35 3 xe RR cade ad have 195 To Vary The Speed Setting 195 Setting The Following Distance In ACC 196 Overtake Aid ssec eds 200 Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Menu 201 Display Warnings And Maintenance 202 Precautions While Driving With ACC 206 Ge
366. ool Service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifica tions should be obtained immediately To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam age Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 529 Cooling System WARNING You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot Engine Coolant Checks Check the engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh OAT coolant conforming to MS 12106 by an authorized dealer Check the front of the A C condenser for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser Check the engine cooling system h
367. operating conditions Routine fluid level checks are not required therefore the transmission has no dipstick Your authorized dealer can check your transmission fluid level using special service tools If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the transmission fluid level checked Operating the vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmis sion damage CAUTION e If a transmission fluid leak occurs visit your au thorized dealer immediately Severe transmission damage may occur Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately Fluid And Filter Changes Under normal operating conditions the fluid installed at the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle Routine fluid and filter changes are not required How ever change the fluid and filter if the transmission is disassembled for any reason EE MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 541 Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and chemicals that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contami nants road surfaces on which the vehicl
368. or left Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear pat terns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Both under inflation and over inflation affect the stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause erratic and unpredictable steering response Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar or rear edge of the driver s side door At least once a month Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality pocket type pressure gauge Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage 424 STARTING AND OPERATING ME CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always
369. or the HomeLink indicator to change flash rates When it changes it is programmed It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases The garage door may open and close while you are programming Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button and observe the indicator light e If the indicator light stays on constantly program ming is complete and the garage door device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels If you unplugged the garage door opener device for programming plug it back in at this time Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Canadian Gate Operator Programming Step 2 and follow all remaining steps A UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251 Using HomeLink amp To operate press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the programmed device i e garage door opener gate operator security system entry door lock home office lighting etc The hand held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time Security I
370. ors will move slightly downward from the present position when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE Outside mirrors will then return to the original position when the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE position Each stored memory setting will have an associated Tilt Mirrors in Reverse position NOTE The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not enabled when delivered from the factory The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature can be enabled or disabled in the Uconnect system screen Refer to Customer Program mable Features Uconnect Access 8 4 Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation Illuminated Vanity Mirrors To access an illuminated vanity mirror flip down one of the visors Lift the cover to reveal the mirror The light will turn on automatically 030409524 Illuminated Vanity Mirror ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 Sun Visor Slide On Rod Feature If Equipped The sun visor Slide On Rod feature allows for addi tional flexibility in positioning the sun visor to block out the sun 1 Fold down the sun visor 2 Unclip the visor from the center clip 3 Pull the sun visor toward the inside rearview mirror to extend it BLIND SPOT MONITORING IF EQUIPPED The Blind Spot Monitoring BSM system uses two radar based sensors located inside the rear bumper fascia to detect highway licensable vehicles automobiles trucks motorcycles etc t
371. oses for brittle rubber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the coolant recovery bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks With the engine at normal operating temperature but not running check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of engine coolant antifreeze from the radiator drain cock If the cap is sealing properly the engine coolant anti freeze will begin to drain from the coolant recovery bottle DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT 530 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cooling System Drain Flush And Refill CAUTION Continued If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or contains Organic Additive Technology OAT engine cool visible sediment clean and flush with OAT coolant ant is different and should not be mixed with antifreeze that meets the requirements of Chrysler Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT en Mia pental Standard MELEG gine coolant antifreeze or any globally compat Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper ible coolant antifreeze If a non OAT engine maintenance intervals coolant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency it should be flushed with OAT coolant and replaced with the specified OAT Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in engine coolant antifreeze as soon as possible Maintaining Your Vehicle for
372. ot use a tire wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus pension dimensions and performance characteris tics resulting in changes to steering handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredict able handling and stress to steering and suspen sion components You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle Continued e Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure You could lose control and have a collision e Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control CAUTION Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer read ings ee STARTING AND OPERATING 433 TIRE CHAINS TRACTION DEVICES CAUTION Use of traction devices require sufficient tire to body clear ance Follow these recommendations to guard against To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires observe the damage following precautions Because of restricted traction device clearance be tween tires and other suspension components it is important that only t
373. oubled Windshield Washer Operation 031563350 Windshield Washer Operation To use the washer push on the end of the lever toward the steering wheel and hold while spray is desired If the ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177 If the end of the lever is pushed while the wipers are in the off position the wipers will operate for several wipe cycles then turn off WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use Mist Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make occasional usage of the wipers necessary Rotate the end of the lever downward to the Mist position and release for a single wiping cycle NOTE The mist feature does not activate the washer pump therefore no washer fluid will be sprayed on the windshield The wash function must be used in order to spray the windshield with washer fluid 031563345 Mist Control 178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped This feature senses moisture on the windshield and automatically activates the wipers for the driver The feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to o
374. pages that follow contain the required maintenance Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids services determined by the engineers who designed your that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle vehicle and also allow extended maintenance inter Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed vals Do not use chemical flushes in these compo maintenance schedule there are other components which nents as the chemicals can damage your engine may require servicing or replacement in the future transmission power steering or air conditioning Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If a flush is needed because of component malfunction use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure CAUTION e Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs damage to other components or Engine Oil negatively impact vehicle performance Immediately Che cking Oil Level have potential malfunctions examined by an autho rized dealer or qualified repair center To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at Continued Tegular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 515 check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off or before starting the engine after it has s
375. passenger cars are not intended It handles and maneuvers differently from many passenger cars both on road and off road so take time to become familiar with your vehicle The two wheel drive version of this vehicle was designed for on road use only It is not intended for off road driving or use in other severe conditions suited for a four wheel drive vehicle Before you start to drive this vehicle read the Owner s Manual Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls particularly those used for braking steering transmis sion and transfer case shifting Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces Your driving skills will improve with experience When driving off road or working the vehicle don t overload the vehicle or expect the vehicle to overcome the natural laws of physics Always observe federal state provincial and local laws wherever you drive As with other vehicles of this type failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a collision Refer to On Road Off Road Driving Tips in Starting And Operating for further information ee INTRODUCTION 5 This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assis tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle It is supplemented by Warranty Information and various customer oriented documents Please take the time to read these publications carefully Following the ins
376. ped With Passive Entry if 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is pro grammed touching the handle more than once will only result in the driver s door opening If driver door first is selected once the driver door is opened the interior door lock unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors or use RKE transmitter ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323 Passive Entry This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles door s without having to press the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons To make your selection touch the Passive Entry soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle e Memory To FOB If Equipped This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle To make your selection touch the Memory Linked To FOB soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu NOTE The seat will return to the memorized seat location if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set to ON when the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is used to unlock the door Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for
377. ped with an automatic door unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch is in the OFF position 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel switch is used to lock the vehicle once all open doors have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters If one of the vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmitters is detected inside the vehicle and no other valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters are detected out side the vehicle the Passive Entry System automatically unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive Entry RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle To Unlock Enter The Liftgate The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is built into the electronic liftgate handle With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft 1 0 m of the liftgate press the electronic liftgate handle for a power open on vehicles equipped with Power Liftgate Press the electronic lift gate handle and lift for Manual Liftgate vehicles NOTE If the vehicle is unlocked then the liftgate will open with the handle and no RKE Transmitter is required 022274241 Electronic Liftgate Handle Liftgate Passive Entry Location ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 To Lock The Liftgate With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within
378. peeds and remain on longer 360 STARTING AND OPERATING ME The engine idle speed will be lower The overall driving performance will be more conservative e Some ECO mode functions may be temporarily inhib ited based on temperature and other factors Eight Speed Automatic Transmission Your vehicle is equipped with a state of the art fuel efficient eight speed transmission The electronic shift lever in this vehicle does not slide like a conventional shifter Instead the shift lever is spring loaded and moves forward and rearward always returning to the center position after each gear is selected The transmission gear PRND is displayed both on the shift lever and in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC To select a gear range press the lock button on the shift lever and move the lever rearward or forward You must press the brake pedal to shift the transmission out of PARK or to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds refer to Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System in this sec tion To shift past multiple gear ranges at once such as PARK to DRIVE move the lever past the first or second detent Select the DRIVE range for normal driving The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are self calibrating therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt This is
379. pen with one fluid motion To Lock The Liftgate With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft 1 0 m of the liftgate press the passive entry lock button located to the right of electronic liftgate handle NOTE The liftgate passive entry lock button will only lock the liftgate the liftgate unlock feature is built into the electronic liftgate handle 022274241 Passive entry Lock Button Location 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 0222001421 Electronic Release Switch Lock Only Button WARNING Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your pas sengers could be injured by these fumes Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle Power Liftgate If Equipped The power liftgate may be opened by pressing Q2 the electronic liftgate handle refer to Keyless Enter N Go located in Things To Know Before Starting or by pressing the LIFTGATE button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter Press the LIFTGATE button on the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds to open the power liftgate Once the liftgate is open pressing the button twice within five seconds a second time will close the liftgate The power liftgate may also be opened or closed by pressing the LIFTGATE button located on the front overhead console or closed by pressing the LIFTGATE button located on left rear trim panel near the liftgate openin
380. per able Floor Mat Safety Information Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your vehicle Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways 112 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per sonal injury e Always make sure that floor mats are properly attached to the floor mat fasteners e Never place or install floor mats or other floor coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and interfer ing with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top of already installed floor mats Additional floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals Continued WARNING Continued Check mounting of mats on a regular basis Always properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning e Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver footwell while the vehicle is moving Ob jects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control If required mounting posts must be properly in stalled if not equipped
381. ploy in crashes with little vehicle front end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and type of collision Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli sions and also are needed to help keep you in position away from an inflating air bag The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON RUN position If the key is in the OFF 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment e Also the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning ry Light in the instrument panel for approxi mately four to eight seconds for a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound
382. posure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed Refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for the size designation of your tire The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire sidewall See the Tire Sizing Chart ex ample found in the Tire Safety Information section of this manual for more information relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle s handling If you ever replace a wheel make sure that the wheel s specifications match those of the original wheels It is recommended you contact your authorized tire or original equipment dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle 432 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING WARNING Continued Do n
383. pped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle Continued time the vehicle is raised Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open FLEXIBLE FUEL 3 6L ENGINE ONLY IF EQUIPPED E 85 General Information The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel vehicles only These vehicles can be identified by a unique fuel filler door label that states Ethanol E 85 or Unleaded Gasoline Only This section only covers those subjects that are unique to these vehicles Please refer to the other sections of this manual for information on features that are common between Flexible Fuel and gasoline only powered vehicles ee STARTING AND OPERATING 447 CAUTION Ethanol Fuel E 85 E 85 is a mixture of approximately 8576 fuel ethanol and Only vehicles with the E 85 fuel filler door label can 15 unleaded gasoline operate on E 85 WARNING Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could cause serious personal injury Never have any smok ing materials lit in or near the vehicle when remov ing the fuel filler tube cap gas cap or filling the tank Do not use E 85 as a cleaning agent and never use it near an open flame E85 ETHANOL Fuel Requirements If your vehicle is E 85 compatible it will operate on unleaded gasoline with an octane rating
384. press and slide the soft key temperature bar towards the blue arrow soft key for cooler temperature settings NOTE Pressing this button while in Sync mode will automatically exit Sync 9 SYNC Press the Sync soft key to toggle the Sync feature On Off The Sync indicator is illuminated when this feature is enabled Sync is used to synchronize the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting Changing the passenger temperature setting while in Sync will automatically exit this feature 10 Blower Control Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system There are seven blower speeds available Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode to switch to manual operation The 336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME speeds can be selected using either hard keys or soft keys as follows Hard key The blower speed increases as you turn the control clockwise from the lowest blower setting The blower speed decreases as you turn the knob counter clockwise Soft key Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons 11 Modes The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets floor outlets demist outlets and defrost outlets The Mode settings are as follows Panel Mode gt
385. previous menu Refer to Lights Smart Beam If Equipped in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information e Daytime Running Lights If Equipped When this feature is selected the headlights will turn on whenever the engine is running To make your selection touch the Daytime Running Lights soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Flash Headlights With Lock When this feature is selected the headlights will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected To make your selection touch the Flash Head lights with Lock soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Doors amp Locks After pressing the Doors amp Locks soft key the following settings will be available e Auto Unlock On Exit When this feature is selected all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver s door is opened To make your selection touch the Auto Unlock On Exit soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return t
386. r Micro Description Cavity Car Micro Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse F63 20 Amp Ignition Coils F70 20Amp Fuel Pump Motor Yellow Gas Urea Heater Yellow Diesel F71 30 Amp Audio Amplifier F64 25 Amp Fuel Injectors Green Natural Powertrain F73 15 Amp HID Headlamps F66 10 Amp Sunroof Passenger Blue Right Red Window Switches F74 20 Amp Brake Vacuum Rain Sensor Yellow Pump F67 15 Amp CD DVD If Equipped Blue Bluetooth Hands F76 10Amp Antilock Brakes free Module Red Electronic Stability If Equipped Control F68 20Amp Rear Wiper Motor Yellow 552 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Car Micro Description Cavity Car Micro Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse F77 10 Amp Drivetrain Control F82 10 Amp Steering Column Red Module Front Axle Red Control Module Disconnect Module Cruise Control F78 10 Amp Engine Control F83 10 Amp Fuel Door Red Module Electric Red Power Steering F84 15 Amp Switch Bank If Equipped Blue Instrument Cluster F80 10 Amp Universal Garage F85 10 Amp Airbag Module Red Door Opener Red Cones f Ani F86 10 Amp Airbag Module Intrusion Module Red F81 20 Amp Trailer Tow Right Yellow Turn Stop Lights MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 553 Cavity Car Micro Description Cavity Car Micro Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse F87 10 Amp Air Suspension
387. r drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on HOT H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call for service WARNING You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel Being under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack Continued 482 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING Continued The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas Jack Location The scissor type jack and tire changing tools are located in
388. r further information refer to Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC If Equipped of your owners manual for more information 7 Turn Signal Indicator The arrows will flash with the exterior turn sig nals when the turn signal lever is operated A tone will chime and an EVIC message will appear if either turn signal is left on for more than 1 mile 1 6 km NOTE If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate check for a defective outside light bulb 8 Speedometer Indicates vehicle speed 9 Selectable EVIC Information This area of the cluster will display selectable informa tion such as compass outside temperature etc For further information refer to Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC If Equipped of your owners manual for more information 10 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL LS The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is part of an onboard diagnostic system called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission con trol systems The light will illuminate when the key is in the ON RUN position before engine start If the bulb ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287 does not come on when turning the key from OFF to WARNING ON RUN have the condition checked promptly NING Certain conditions poor fuel quality etc may illuminate A malfunctioning catalytic converter as referenced the light after engine start The vehicle should be serviced above can reach higher temperatures tha
389. r gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee However if you haven t healed significantly within a Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor ployed If you are involved in another collision the air immediately As the air bags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the non toxic gas used for air bag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s in structions for cleaning bags will not be in place to protect you WARNING Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision Have the air bags seat belt pretensioners and the front seat belt retrac tor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer im mediately Also have the Occupant Restraint Con troller ORC system serviced as well E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81 Maintaining Your Air Bag System WARNING Modifications to any part of the air bag system could cause it to fail whe
390. r seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat Owner s Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your child Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards You should also make sure that you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it NOTE For additional information refer to www seatcheck org or call 1 866 SEATCHECK Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada s website for additional information http www tc gc ca eng roadsafety safedrivers childsafety index 53 htm WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child can become a projectile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85 Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles Child Size Height Weight or Age Recommended Type of Child Restraint Infants and Toddlers Children who are two ye
391. r to Rear Window Features in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle 031563090 Multifunction Lever EN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175 Windshield Wiper Operation CAUTION Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first four detent positions for intermittent settings the fifth detent for low wiper operation and the sixth detent for high wiper operation Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the park position If the windshield wiper switch is turned off and the blades cannot return to the park position damage to the wiper motor may occur Intermittent Wiper System Use one of the four intermittent wiper settings when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable delay between cycles desirable At driving speeds above 10 mph 16 km h the delay can be regulated from a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between cycles first detent to a cycle every one second fourth detent 031563345 Windshield Wiper Operation 176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se lever is pushed while in the intermittent setting the 4 wipers will turn on and operate for several wipe cycles Y after the end of the lever is released and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected 031563345 Intermittent Wiper Operation NOTE If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph 16 km h delay times will be d
392. r tween DRIVE and REVERSE do not spin the further information Once the vehicle has been freed wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drivetrain press the ESC Off switch again to restore ESC On damage may result mode Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure It can also damage the tires Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph 48 km h while in gear no trans mission shifting occurring Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure Allow the en gine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking motion WARNING cycles This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage or even failure of the axle and tires A tire could Continued 498 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME WARNING Continued explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehi cle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS IF EQUIPPED If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks there will be one in the rear and two mounted on the front of the vehicle The re
393. raction devices in good condi e Install on Rear Tires Only tion are used Broken devices can cause serious damage Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate device breakage Remove the damaged parts of the device before further use e Install device as tightly as possible and then re tighten after driving about mile 0 8 km Do not exceed 30 mph 48 km h Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps especially with a loaded vehicle Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pave ment Traction device must be of proper size for the tire as recommended by the traction device manufacturer e Due to limited clearance the Security Chain Company SCC Super Z6 low profile traction device or equivalent is recommended on P265 60R18 or 265 50R20 tires WARNING Using tires of different size and type M S Snow between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable handling You could lose control and have a collision Continued 434 STARTING AND OPERATING ME CAUTION Continued Observe the traction device manufacturer s instruc tions on the method of installation operating speed and conditions for use Always use the suggested operating speed of the device manufacturer s if it is less than 30 mph 48 km h Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at different loa
394. re of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 519 Maintenance Free Battery WARNING Continued Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance free battery You will never have to add water nor is periodic main tenance required WARNING e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Do not lean e Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the battery Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other e Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flu
395. reeze Coolant 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula OAT Organic Additive Technology that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 12106 e Mix a minimum solution of 50 OAT engine coolant that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan dard MS 12106 and distilled water Use higher concen trations not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion ized water when mixing the water engine coolant antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system 532 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types is not recommended and can result in cooling system damage Drain flush and refill as soon as possible to avoid damage if coolant types are mixed in an emergency Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant antifreeze and to ensure that engine coolant antifreeze will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery tank The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces WARNING The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on t
396. required for the engine and drivetrain transmission and axle in your vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri mental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur For the recom mended viscosity and quality grades refer to Mainte nance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle CAUTION Never use Non Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may result es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 109 NOTE A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered a normal part of the break in and e Do not leave children or animals inside parked not interpreted as an indication of difficulty vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death SAFETY TIPS e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area Transporting Passengers inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
397. ress the FWD Collision Warning Far or Near soft key for your desired preference Then press the back arrow 6 Press the second FWD Collision W soft key 7 Press the Active Braking On or Off soft key The default status of FCW is the Far setting and the Active Braking is the On setting this allows the system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther away and it applies limited braking This gives you the most reaction time to avoid a possible collision Changing the FCW status to the Near setting allows the system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are much closer This setting provides less reaction time than the Far setting which allows for a more dynamic driving experience NOTE e The system will retain the last setting selected by the driver after ignition shut down e FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as overhead objects ground reflections objects not in the path of the car stationary objects that are far away oncoming traffic or leading vehicles with the same or higher rate of speed e FCW will be disabled like ACC with the unavailable screens FCW Limited Warning If the system turns off and the EVIC displays ACC FCW Limited Functionality or ACC FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield momentarily there may be a condition that limits FCW functionality 218 UNDER
398. rmine the conditions at the crest and or on the other side Before climbing a steep hill shift the transmission to a lower gear and shift the transfer case to 4WD LOW Use first gear and 4WD LOW for very steep hills 390 STARTING AND OPERATING ME If you stall or begin to lose forward motion while climbing a steep hill allow your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately apply the brakes Restart the engine and shift into REVERSE Back slowly down the hill allowing the compression braking of the engine to help regulate your speed If the brakes are required to control vehicle speed apply them lightly and avoid locking or skidding the tires WARNING If the engine stalls you lose forward motion or cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or grade never attempt to turn around To do so may result in tipping and rolling the vehicle Always back care fully straight down a hill in REVERSE gear Never back down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the brake Remember never drive diagonally across a hill always drive straight up or down If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a hill ease off the accelerator and maintain forward motion by turning the front wheels slowly This may provide a fresh bite into the surface and will usually provide traction to complete the climb Traction Downhill Shift the transmission into a low gear and the transfer case into AWD LOW range Let the vehicle go slowly down the hi
399. ronmental Protection Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air condi tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to Warranty Information Book located on the DVD NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C system for further warranty information sealers stop leak products seal conditioners compressor The air conditioning system contains refrigerant Oil and refrigerants under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician 522 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE A C Air Filter Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING Do not remove the A C air filter while the blower is operating or personal injury may result The A C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind the glove box Perform the following procedure to re place the filter 1 Open the glove compartment and remove all contents 2 Push in on the sides of the glove compartment
400. ront brake rotors It only functions when the windshield wipers are in the LO or HI mode it does not function in the intermittent mode When Rain Brake Support is active there is no notification to the driver and no driver interaction is required Hill Descent Control HDC Four Wheel Drive Models With MP3023 Two Speed Transfer Case Only HDC maintains vehicle speed while descending hills during off road driving situations and is available in 4WD LOW range only To enable HDC press the HDC switch ee STARTING AND OPERATING 407 When HDC is enabled the HDC icon will be illuminated in the instrument cluster HDC will automatically apply the brakes to control downhill speed to the selected level when necessary on grades greater than approximately 8 It will usually not activate on level ground The HDC speed may be adjusted by the driver to suit the driving conditions The speed corresponds to the trans mission gear selected HDC operation can be overridden with brake application to slow the vehicle down below the HDC control speed Conversely if more speed is desired during HDC control the accelerator pedal will increase vehicle speed in the usual manner When either the brake or the accelerator is released HDC will control the vehicle back to the origi nal set speed HDC Operation In 4WD Low Range To enable HDC press the HDC switch The HDC icon will be illuminated in the instrument cluster and HDC will function If t
401. rrain Driver Assist Fuel Economy Trip A Trip B Audio Stored Messages Screen Set Up e RIGHT Arrow Button EVIC Buttons Press and release the RIGHT arrow button to gt access the information screens or sub menu screens of a main menu item es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297 e BACK LEFT Arrow Button Press and release the LEFT arrow button to access the information screens or sub menu screens of a main menu item e OK Button Press the OK button to access select the information screens or sub menu screens of a main menu item Press and hold the OK arrow button for two seconds to reset displayed selected features that can be reset Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays The EVIC displays are located in the center portion of the cluster and consists of eight sections 1 Main Screen The inner ring of the display will illuminate in grey under normal conditions yellow for non critical warnings red for critical warnings and white for on demand information 2 Audio Phone Information and Sub menu Informa tion Whenever there are sub menus available the position within the sub menus is shown here 3 Reconfigurable Telltales Information 4 Telltales Indicators 5 Shift Lever Status PRNDL 6 Selectable Information Compass Temp Range to Empty Trip A Trip B Average MPG 7 Air Suspension Status 8 4WD Status 9 Selectable Gauge 2 10 Selectable Gauge 1 298 UNDERSTA
402. rs on the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window e Keep all objects a safe distance from the window ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 279 ROOF LUGGAGE RACK IF EQUIPPED The crossbars and siderails are designed to carry the weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack The load must not exceed 150 lbs 68 kg and should be uniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars NOTE If not equipped with crossbars your authorized dealer can order and install MOPAR crossbars built specifically for this roof rack system Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack crossbars The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying capacity of the vehicle Be sure the total load of cargo inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity To move the crossbars loosen the attachments located at the upper edge of each crossbar approximately eight turns using the anti theft wrench provided with the MOPAR crossbars Then move the crossbar to the desired position keeping the crossbars parallel to the rack frame Once the crossbar is in the desired position retighten the with the wrench to lock the crossbar into pos
403. s All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap shoulder belts The belt webbing retractor is de signed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move WARNING Continued freely with you under normal conditions However in an a collision the belt will lock and reduce the risk of you Two people should never be belted into a single striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in a collision hurting one another badly WARNING Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat than one person no matter what their size e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of a collision the best outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in a collision much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep
404. s above 75 mph 120 km h refer to ee STARTING AND OPERATING 427 original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures While studded tires improve performance on ice skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non studded tires Some states pro hibit studded tires therefore local laws should be checked before using these tire types Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel If Equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel equivalent in look and function to the original equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle If your vehicle has this option refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern Compact Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter T or S preceding the size designation Example T145 80D18 103M T S Temporary Spare Tire Since this tire has limited tread life the original equip ment tire should be repaired or replaced
405. s by following steps 1 4 above and press ing the UNLOCK button instead of LOCK on the RKE transmitter in Step 4 Memory Position Recall NOTE The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory positions If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in PARK a message will be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Driver One Memory Position Recall To recall the memory settings for driver one using the memory switch press MEMORY button number 1 on the memory switch e To recall the memory settings for driver one using the RKE transmitter press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1 Driver Two Memory Position Recall To recall the memory setting for driver two using the memory switch press MEMORY button number 2 on the memory switch To recall the memory settings for driver two using the RKE transmitter press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 2 A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the MEMORY buttons during a recall S 1 or 2 When a recall is cancelled the driver s seat driver s mirror and the steering column stop moving A delay of one second will occur before another recall can be selected Easy Entry Exit Seat This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 The distance the driver s
406. s raised first 2 Lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the wiper blade off of the liftgate glass 3 Grab the bottom of the wiper blade and rotate it forward to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the wiper blade holder 4 1 Wiper Blade 2 Blade Pivot Pin 3 Wiper Arm 4 Wiper Blade Holder Wav 072607742 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 525 4 Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade holder at the end of the wiper arm and firmly press the wiper blade until it snaps into place 5 Lower the wiper blade and snap the pivot cap into place Adding Washer Fluid On vehicles equipped with a Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC the low washer fluid level will be indicated When the sensor detects a low fluid level the windshield will light on the vehicle graphic outline and the WASHER FLUID LOW message will be displayed The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the rear window washer is shared The fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment be sure to check the fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent only not radiator antifreeze 526 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M When refilling the washer fluid reservoir take some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe clean the wiper blades this will help blade performance To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold weather select a solution or
407. s the maximum permissible cold tire inflation Pressure pressure for this tire The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall STARTING AND OPERATING 417 Term Definition Recommended Cold Tire Vehicle manufacturer s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on Inflation Pressure the tire placard Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle s loading capacity the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Tire And Loading Information Placard Location NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar or the rear edge of the driver s side door 055001823 B Pillar Location for Tire And Loading Information Placard 418 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire And Loading Information Placard SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 FRONT 2 REAR 3 THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX KG QR XXX i5s FRONT REAR SPARE ORIGINAL TIRE SIZE P195 70R14 P195 70R14 T125 70D15 COLD TIRE 29PSI SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AR 4N109268 TIRE 811b5a9a Tire and Loading Information Placard This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 total weight your vehicle can carry 3 tire size designed for your vehicle 4 cold tire i
408. s then followed by a graphic display with pressure values still shown This indicates the pressure values are still being received from the TPM Sensors but they may not be located in the correct vehicle position However the system still needs to be serviced as long as the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message exists NOTE There is no tire pressure monitoring sensor in the spare tire The TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire pressure If you install the spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition switch cycle the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will remain ON a chime will sound and the EVIC will still display a pressure value in the different color graphic display and an Inflate to XXX kPa message will be displayed After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid In addition the EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for five seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value For each subsequent ignition switch cycle a chime will sound the Tire Pressure Monitoring ee STARTING AND OPERATING 441 Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid and the EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for five seconds and then dis play dashes in place of the pressure valu
409. sabled the EVIC will display the PARKSENSE OFF message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE The ParkSense switch LED will be ON when ParkSense is disabled or requires service The ParkSense switch LED will be OFF when the system is enabled If the ParkSense switch is pressed and the system requires service the ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily and then the LED will be ON ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235 Service The ParkSense Park Assist System When the ParkSense System is malfunctioning the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime once per ignition cycle and it will display the PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS or the PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED message When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted condition with the front sensors the EVIC will display UNAVAILABLE at the front sensor location of the car graphic The system will continue to provide arc alerts at the rear sensor location When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted condition with the rear sensors the EVIC will display the PARKSENSE UN AVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS or PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE Under this condition ParkSense will not operate Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Underst
410. se 427 Console Overhead 0 0 0 00 eee eee 241 Contract Service s i4 osi uur p Ae ew ee aa eae a 579 Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator Cap Cooling System aed aos Gia c eA teas aed 529 Adding Coolant Antifreeze sss 531 Coolant Capacity 4s sd od E ninss 563 Coolant Level llle 533 Disposal of Used Coolant lis 533 Drain Flush and Refill Ls 530 Inspection i s 2a eda igen EE bee 529 Points to Remember llle 534 Pressure Cap s Te estu DRE owes ER 33s 532 Radiator Cap usi esegue pde RS Reg th 532 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 530 Corrosion Protection 0 0 0 541 Cruise Control Speed Control 188 Cupholders 25 ts eder oe eh Ee ways 266 Customer Assistance n o aaa aaa ee 577 Data Recorder Event llle een 82 Daytime Running Lights ss ctes eissa cimaas 167 Dealer Service 6 ees 513 en INDEX 589 Defroster Rear Window llle 278 Defroster Windshield llus 111 Dipsticks OU Engitie n act acere heat target eer te dens 514 Power Steering iis tienen eied eds edes 394 Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant 533 Door LOCKS 2 nad ivkeetetceeeeuadedgeed 32 Door Opener Garage llle 244 aranpa DC UE 385 Off Pavemernt 23x 005224 pikante AS 386 Off Road soced xu 3 xe kc Y 3E ERR 386 E 85 Fuel ie e rem RR RERERI 446 Economy
411. se of 1 mph 1 km h If the SET button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph 10 km h increments until the button is released The decrease in set speed is reflected in the EVIC display NOTE When you override and push the SET button or SET buttons the current vehicle speed will become the set speed of the system e When you use the SET button to decelerate if the engine s braking power does not slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach the set speed the brake system will automatically slow the vehicle The ACC system applies the brakes when following the host vehicle and will hold the brakes at a complete stop for 2 seconds and then release The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up hill and down hill However a slight speed change on moderate hills is normal In addition downshifting may occur while climbing uphill or descending down hill This is normal operation and necessary to main tain set speed When driving up hill and down hill the ACC system will cancel if the braking temperature exceeds normal range overheated Setting The Following Distance In ACC The specified following distance for ACC can be set by varying the distance setting between four bars longest three bars long two bars medium and one bar short Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed ACC calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead This distance setting displa
412. service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month When additional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to maintain the proper level only OAT coolant that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 12106 should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill 534 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE IEEE Points To Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is nor mally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot engine coolant antifreeze to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant expansion bottle If engine coolant antifreeze needs to be added the contents of the coolant expansion bottle must also be protected against freezing If frequent engine coolant antifreeze additions are required the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks Maintain engine coolant antifreeze concentration at a minimum of 50 OAT coolant conforming to MS 12106 and distille
413. ses that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass lights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore differ ent lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing 031409529 Headlight Switch CAUTION To turn on the headlights rotate the headlight D switch clockwise When the headlight switch is Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents on the parking lights taillights license plate light and instrument panel lights are also turned on To turn off the headlights rotate the headlight switch back to the O Off position Ww steel wool or other abrasive materials to clean the lenses ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 Automatic Headlights If Equipped This system automatically turns the headlights on or off according to ambient light levels To turn the system on rotate the headlight switch to the A AUTO position When the system is on the Headlight Delay feature is also on This means the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch to the OFF position To turn the automatic headlights off turn the headlight switch out of the AUTO position NOTE The engine must be running before the head lights will turn on in the Automatic Mode He
414. sh the area imme diately with large amounts of water Refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies for further information Continued 520 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE CAUTION e It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked posi tive and negative and are identified on the battery case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion e If a fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables be fore connecting the charger to the battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning system as the chemicals can damage your air condi tioning components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty EE MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 521 WARNING Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro carbon HFC that is endorsed by the Envi
415. shift lever is in the SPORT position Entry Exit Mode Lowers the vehicle approximately 1 5 in 38 mm This position lowers the vehicle for easier passenger entry and exit as well as lowering the rear of the vehicle for easier loading and unloading of cargo To enter Entry Exit Mode press the Down button once from NRH while the vehicle speed is below 25 mph 40 km h Once the vehicle speed goes below 15 mph 24 km h the vehicle height will begin to lower If the vehicle speed remains between 15 mph 24 km h and 25 mph 40 km h for greater than 60 seconds or the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph 40 km h the Entry Exit Mode change will be can celled To exit Entry Exit Mode press the Up button once while in Park Mode or drive the vehicle over 15 mph 24 km h NOTE Automatic lowering of the vehicle into Entry Exit Mode can be enabled through the Uconnect Touch Screen Radio If this feature is enabled the vehicle will only lower if the shift lever is in PARK the terrain switch is in AUTO and the transfer case is in AUTO The Selec Terrain switch will automatically change the vehicle to the proper height based on the position of the Selec Terrain switch The height can be changed from the default Selec Terrain setting by normal use of the air suspension buttons Refer to Selec Terrain in Starting and Operating for further information E STARTING AND OPERATING 381 The system requires
416. shing Flashing Radio Volume No Yes Yes Yes Yes NOTE ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio if on when the system is sounding an audio tone 224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Enabling And Disabling ParkSense amp ParkSense amp can be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense switch When the ParkSense switch is pressed to dis able the system the instrument cluster will dis play the PARKSENSE OFF message for ap proximately five seconds Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled the EVIC will display the PARKSENSE OFF message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE The ParkSense switch LED will be ON when ParkSense is disabled or requires service The ParkSense switch LED will be OFF when the system is enabled If the ParkSense switch is pressed and the system requires service the ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily and then the LED will be ON Pya OFF Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System When the ParkSense Rear Park Assist System is mal functioning the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime once per ignition cycle and it will display the PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS or the PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED message Refer to Electronic Vehicle I
417. side of the headlight switch is rotated to the its farthest upward position or if equipped when the UNLOCK button is pressed on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter When a door is open and the interior lights are on rotating the dimmer control all the way down to the OFF detent will cause all the interior lights to go out This is also known as the Party mode because it allows the doors to stay open for extended periods of time without discharging the vehicle s battery The brightness of the instrument panel lighting can be regulated by rotating the dimmer control up brighter or down dimmer When the headlights are on you can 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se supplement the brightness of the odometer trip odom eter radio and overhead console by rotating the control to its farthest position up until you hear a click This feature is termed the Parade mode and is useful when headlights are required during the day 031409585 Dimmer Control Lights On Reminder If the headlights parking lights or cargo lights are left on after the ignition is turned OFF a chime will sound when the driver s door is opened Battery Saver To protect the life of your vehicle s battery load shedding is provided for both the interior and exterior lights If the ignition is OFF and any door is left ajar for 10 minutes or the dimmer control is rotated all the way up to the dome ON position for 10 minutes the
418. sing the brake fluid to catch fire Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid Brake seal components could be damaged causing partial or complete brake failure This could result in a collision ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 537 Front Rear Axle Fluid For normal service periodic fluid level checks are not required When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be inspected If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Front Axle Fluid Level Check The front axle oil level needs to be between 1 8 in 3 mm below the bottom of the fill hole and the bottom of the fill hole The front axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to 22 to 29 ft Ibs 30 to 40 N m CAUTION Do not over tighten the plugs as it could damage them and cause them to leak Rear Axle Fluid Level Check The rear axle oil level needs to be between 1 8 in 3 mm below the bottom of the fill hole and the bottom of the fill hole The rear axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to 22 to 29 ft Ibs 30 to 40 N m on axles with aluminum housings The rear axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to 22 to 52 ft Ibs 30 to 70 N m on axl
419. sing Sunroof Manual Mode To close the sunroof press and hold the switch in the forward position Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed condition until the switch is pushed and held forward again Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation If an ob struction in the path of the sunroof is detected the sunroof will automatically retract Remove the obstruc tion if this occurs Next press the switch forward and release to Express Close ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255 NOTE If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in Pinch Protect reversals the fourth close attempt will be a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled Venting Sunroof Express Press and release the Vent button within one half second and the sunroof will open to the vent position This is called Express Vent and it will occur regardless of sunroof position During Express Vent operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually However the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit win
420. sion and serious Some models may be equipped with manual front driver injury or death e Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt Adjustment Bar 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Manual Front Passenger Seatback Adjustment WARNING Recline To adjust the seatback lift the lever located on the Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the outboard side of the seat lean back to the desired position and release the lever To return the seatback lift the lever lean forward and release the lever shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt which could result in serious injury or death Front Passenger Seat Fold Flat Feature If Equipped To fold the seatback to the flat load floor position lift the recline lever and push the seatback forward To return to the seating position raise the seatback and lock it into place Recline Lever UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 WARNING Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaus tion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of
421. sound After the bulb check or when driving if the driver or front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled the Seat Belt Indicator Light will flash or remain on continuously Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285 3 Anti Lock Brake ABS Light es If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System ABS The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock brakes If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position have the light inspected by an authorized dealer 286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se 4 High Beam Indicator Z Indicates that headlights are on high beam 5 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped ZO This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on 6 Selectable EVIC Information This area of the cluster will display selectable informa tion such as compass outside temperature etc Fo
422. splay Messages lesse 383 54 T Engines amp uu scere od ahaa ate aa a 393 Operations 2 2 esd ERR ey ear Re eai a 383 Power Steering Fluid Check 394 Bl ON ROAD DRIVING TIPS 00 385 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 347 ll FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5 7L ENGINE ONLY IE EQUIPPED os eee eee 395 E PARKING BRAKE 522622386 vend seas 395 ll ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM 397 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 398 Traction Control System TCS 398 Brake Assist System BAS gt cco s ciet cress 399 Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM 400 Electronic Stability Control ESC 400 Trailer Sway Control TSC 403 Hill Start Assist HSA 00 404 Ready Alert Braking If Equipped 406 Rain Brake Support If Equipped 406 E TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Hill Descent Control HDC Four Wheel Drive Models With MP3023 Two Speed Transfer Case Only vise em eR ra Ra er ded 406 Select Speed Control SSC Four Wheel Drive Models With MP3023 Two Speed Transfer Case Only iere tanun E pet RES oe ate nee oo 408 ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light Tire Markings 0 0 cece eee eee 411 Tire Identification Number TIN 415 Tire Terminology And Definitio
423. st have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many authorized dealer you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer They know your vehicle the best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality 578 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ME service The manufacturer s authorized dealer have the facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer They want to know if you need assistance e f an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the manufacturer s customer center Any communication to the manufacturer s customer cen ter should include the following information O
424. st routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD II system is ready or not if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non MOPAR parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person nel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic 514 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES CAUTION Continued The
425. still on the ground 3 Assemble the jack and jacking tools WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 485 060641337 mm Jack and Tool Assembly CAUTION Do not attempt to raise vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle 486 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE 4 For the front axle place the jack on the body flange just behind the front tire as indicated by the triangular lift point symbol on the sill molding Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully engaged 060641339 Jacking Locations 060637589 Lift Point Symbol On Sill Molding WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 487 5 For a rear tire place the jack in the slot on the rear tie down bracket just forward of the rear tire as indicated by the triangular lift point symbol on the sill molding Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully engaged 060641341 Front Jacking Location 060637590 Lift Point Symbol On Sill Molding 488 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Se WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 7 Remove the lug nuts and wheel 8 Position the spare wheel tire on the vehicle and install Qu the lug nuts with the cone shaped end toward the 060641477 wheel Lightly tighten the nuts 6 Raise the vehicle by
426. t braking adequately in the event of a potential frontal collision 216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se NOTE The FCW system state is kept in memory from one key cycle to the next If the system is turned OFF it will remain off when the vehicle is restarted Changing FCW And Active Braking Status To change the FCW and Active Braking settings with Uconnect 8 4 8 4A System Screen if equipped NOTE The settings can only be changed when the vehicle is in PARK Follow these steps to set the FCW and Active Braking 1 Press the Controls soft key located on the bottom of the Uconnect display 2 Press the Settings soft key 3 Press the Safety amp Driving Assistance soft key 4 Press the FWD Collision Warning Far or Near soft key for your desired preference 5 Press the Active Braking On or Off soft key NOTE A check mark will appear in the selection box to indicate the setting To change the FCW and Active Braking settings with Uconnect 5 0 System Screen if equipped NOTE The settings can only be changed when the vehicle is in PARK Follow these steps to set the FCW and Active Braking 1 Press the MORE hard key located on the lower right side of the Uconnect system 2 Press the Settings soft key 3 Press the Safety Assistance soft key 4 Press the first FWD Collision W soft key ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217 5 P
427. t closer to button located at the base of the head restraint and push the back of your head pull forward on the bottom of the downward on the head restraint head restraint Push rearward on the bottom of the head restraint to move the head restraint away from your head Q 030907490 Push Button 022607494 Active Head Restraint Normal Position 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se In the event of deployment of an Active Head Re straint refer to Occupant Restraints Resetting Active Head Restraints AHR in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information WARNING Do not place items over the top of the Active Head Restraint such as coats seat covers or portable EID DVD players These items may interfere with the operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event 030907833 of a collision and could result in serious injury or Active Head Restraint Tilted death NOTE Continued The head restraints should only be removed by quali fied technicians for service purposes only If either of the head restraints require removal see your autho rized dealer ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 WARNING Continued The center head restraint has limited adjustment Lift upward on the head restraint to raise it or push down e Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they ward on the head restraint to lower it are struck by an object such as a ha
428. t is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes Note that all channels will be erased Individual channels cannot be erased The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink here are some of the most common solutions Replace the battery in the original hand held trans mitter e Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to complete the training for a Rolling Code Did you unplug the device for programming and remember to plug it back in If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance 252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE i General Information WARNING Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are programming the universal trans ceiver Do not program the transceiver if people pets or other objects are in the path of the door or gate Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a stop and reverse feature as required by Federal safety standards This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982 Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the I
429. t starting the vehicle and use the accessories follow these steps e Starting with the ignition switch in the OFF position Press the ENGINE START STOP button once to change the ignition switch to the ACC position EVIC will display ACC Press the ENGINE START STOP button a second time to change the ignition switch to the RUN position EVIC will display ON RUN Press the ENGINE START STOP button a third time to return the ignition switch to the OFF position EVIC will display OFF e e Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F Or 29 C To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater avail able from your authorized dealer is recommended If Engine Fails To Start WARNING Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in flash fire causing serious personal injury Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans mission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 355 WARNING Continued e If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This typ
430. t steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door 021806189 i 021862579 Child Protection Door Lock Function Child Protection Door Lock Location WARNING Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the Child Protection locks are engaged locked 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se NOTE For emergency exit from the rear seats when the Child Protection Door Lock System is engaged manually raise the door lock knob to the unlocked position roll down the window and open the door using the outside door handle KEYLESS ENTER N GO The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the vehicle s Remote Keyless Entry RKE system and a feature of Keyless Enter N Go This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle s door s without having to press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons NOTE e Passive Entry may be programmed ON OFF refer to Uconnect in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information e If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door goes ajar within 60 seconds the vehicle will re lock and if equipped will arm the theft alarm e If wearing gloves on your hands or if it has been raining on the Passive Entry door handle the unlock sensitivity can be affected resulting in a slower re sponse time e If you unlock the doors using the passive entry door handles
431. t the two trim panel lights 0733003303 1 Rear Turn Stop Bulb Socket 2 LED Tail Connector Do Not Remove 3 Auxiliary Backup Bulb Socket MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 561 PO 073374394 0733003304 Rear Liftgate Tail Lamps 1 Auxiliary LED Tail Connector Do Not Remove 5 Tail lamps are now visible Rotate socket s counter 2 Backup Bulb Socket clockwise 6 Remove replace bulb s 7 Reinstall the socket s 8 Reverse process to reinstall the liftgate trim 562 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Center High Mounted Stop Lamp CHMSL Rear License Lamp The center high mounted stop lamp is LED Service at The rear license lamps are LED Service at Authorized Authorized Dealer Dealer 073374395 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 563 FLUID CAPACITIES U S Metric Fuel Approximate 3 6L and 5 7L Engines 25 Gallons 94 Liters Engine Oil With Filter 3 6L Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified 6 Quarts 5 6 Liters 5 7L Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified 7 Quarts 6 6 Liters Cooling System 3 6L Engine MOPAR Antifreeze Engine Coolant 10 Year 10 4 Quarts 9 9 Liters 150 000 Mile Formula or equivalent 5 7 Liter Engine MOPAR Antifreeze Engine Coolant 10 Year 15 4 Quarts 14 6 Liters 150 000 Mile Formula or equivalent Without Trailer Tow Package 5 7 Liter Engine MOPAR Antifreeze Engine Coolant 10 Year 16 Quarts 15 2 Liters 150 000 Mile Formula
432. t will flash on and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system fault is detected The system fault will also sound a chime The EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYS TEM message for a minimum of five seconds This message is then followed by a graphic display with in place of the pressure value s indicating which Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor s is not being received NOTE Your system can be set to display pressure units in PSI or kPa If the ignition switch is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists If the system fault no longer exists the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will no longer flash the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message will not be present and a pressure value will be displayed instead of dashes A system fault can occur by any of the following 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 440 STARTING AND OPERATING ME 3 Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors The EVIC will also display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds when a system fault is detected possibly related to an incorrect sensor location fault In this case the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message i
433. tacle including small obstacles Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in to check for pedestrians animals other vehicles obstructions and blind spots before backing up You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death Continued close proximity The vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected It is recommended that the driver looks over his her shoulder when using ParkSense 238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued Before using ParkSenseG it is strongly recom mended that the ball mount and hitch ball assem bly is disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the continuous tone Also the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assem bly depending on its size and shape giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle PARKVIEWG REAR BACK UP CAMERA IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on screen
434. tch is turned to the ON RUN position The Remote Start Comfort System can be activated and deactivated through the Uconnect system For more information on Remote Start Comfort System operation refer to Uconnect in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel DOOR LOCKS The power door locks can be manually locked from inside the vehicle by using the door lock knob To lock each door push the door lock knob on each door trim panel downward To unlock the front doors pull the inside door handle to the first detent To unlock the rear doors pull the door lock knob on the door trim panel upward If the lock knob is down when the door is closed the door will lock Therefore make sure the key is not inside the vehicle before closing the door THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 WARNING Continued e When leaving the vehicle always remove the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle Unsu pervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe personal injuries or death Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal Manual Door Lock Knob or the shift lever 021809601 Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children and
435. te Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel Continued 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN WARNING Continued e Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC and Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Sit upright in the center of the seat e In a collision you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buck led up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Being too close to the Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC and or Seat Mounted Side Air Bag SAB during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times Lap Shoulder Belt
436. te system will return the previous setting 6 Rear Defrost Button Press and release this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors if equipped An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The rear window defroster automatically turns off after 10 minutes CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements e Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window e Keep all objects a safe distance from the window ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335 7 Passenger Temperature Control Up Button Provides the passenger with independent temperature control Push the hard key button for warmer tempera ture settings or on the touch screen press and slide the soft key temperature bar towards the red arrow soft key for warmer temperature settings NOTE Pressing this button while in Sync mode will automatically exit Sync 8 Passenger Temperature Control Down Button Provides the passenger with independent temperature control Push the hard key button for cooler temperature settings or on the touch screen
437. ted fuse continues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected n A9 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 555 VEHICLE STORAGE REPLACEMENT BULBS If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 days you may want to take steps to protect your Interior Bulbs battery You may Bulb Number Disconnect the negative cable from the battery Glove Box Lamp 194 e Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of Crib Handle Tamp HUE service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the Overhead Console VT4976 air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes Reading Lamps in the fresh air and high blower setting This will Rear Cargo Lamp 214 2 ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the Vigor Vanity Lamp V26377 possibility of compressor damage when the system is fyg derpanel Courtesy 906 started again L amps Instrument Cluster 103 General Illumination Telltale Hazard Lamp 74 556 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ME Exterior Bulbs Bulb Number Bulb Number Headlamps Low Beam H11 Auxiliary Liftgate Tail Lamps LED Service at Authorized Dealer Premium Headlamps Low High Beam D3S Serviced at Authorized Dealer Liftgate Backup Lamps 921 W16W Headlamps High Beam 9005 Rear License Lamps LED Service at Authorized Dealer Pre
438. ted when the ignition is turned OFF while the headlight switch is on and then the headlight switch is cycled off Headlight delay can be cancelled by either turning the headlight switch on then off or by turning the ignition ON The headlight delay time is programmable in the Uconnect system screen Refer to Customer Program mable Features Uconnect Access 8 4 Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Parking Lights And Panel Lights 200 To turn on the parking lights and instrument panel lights rotate the headlight switch clockwise To turn off the parking lights rotate the headlight switch back to the O Off position Fog Lights If Equipped The fog lights are turned on by rotating the headlight switch to the parking light or headlight position and pushing in the headlight rotary control 031409584 Fog Light Operation The fog lights will operate only when the parking lights are on or when the vehicle headlights are on low beam An indicator light located in the instrument cluster will illuminate when the fog lights are on The fog lights will turn off when the switch is pushed a second time when UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169 the headlight switch is rotated to the off position or the high beam is selected Interior Lights Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front doors are opened when the dimmer control rotating wheel on the right
439. ter EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information 1 Bring the vehicle to a complete stop with the engine running 2 Press and hold the brake pedal 3 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 4 If vehicle is equipped with Quadra Lift air suspen sion ensure the vehicle is set to Normal Ride Height 5 Using a ballpoint pen or similar object press and hold the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL N button located by the selector switch for four seconds The light behind the N symbol will blink indicating shift in progress The light will stop blinking stay on solid when the shift to NEUTRAL N is complete A FOUR drisi WHEEL DRIVE SYSTEM IN NEUTRAL message NEUTRAL N Switch ee STARTING AND OPERATING 375 6 After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL N light stays on release the NEUTRAL N button 7 Shift the transmission into REVERSE 8 Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure that there is no vehicle movement NOTE If shift conditions interlocks are not met a To Tow Vehicle Safely Read Neutral Shift Procedure in Owners Manual message will flash from the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Quadra Drive amp II System If Equipped The optional Quadra Drive II System features two torque transfer couplings The couplings incl
440. ter than 85 in your vehicle It will cause difficulty in cold starting and may affect driveability 450 STARTING AND OPERATING ADDING FUEL 1 Press the fuel filler door release switch located under the headlamp switch 056810781 Fuel Filler Door 3 There is no fuel filler cap A flapper door inside the pipe seals the system Fuel Filler Door Release Switch 4 Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe the nozzle 2 Open the fuel filler door opens and holds the flapper door while refueling ee STARTING AND OPERATING 451 NOTE Only the correct size nozzle opens the latches allowing the flapper door to open 5 Fill the vehicle with fuel when the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full 6 Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door Emergency Gas Can Refueling Most gas cans will not open the flapper door e A funnel is provided to open the flapper door to allow emergency refueling with a gas can e Retrieve funnel from the spare tire storage area e Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening as the fuel nozzle Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold flapper door open Pour fuel into funnel opening e Remove funnel from filler pipe clean off prior to putting back in the spare tire storage area CAUTION To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling WARNING Never have any smoking materials lit in or
441. tgate switches 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee e e e If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is closing or opening the liftgate will automatically reverse to the closed or open position provided it meets sufficient resistance There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the liftgate Light pressure anywhere along these strips will cause the liftgate to return to the open position The power liftgate must be in the full open position for rear liftgate close button on the left rear trim near the liftgate opening to operate If the liftgate is not fully open press the Liftgate button on the Key Fob to fully open the liftgate and then press it again to close If the liftgate handle is pulled while the power liftgate is closing the liftgate will reverse to the full open position If the liftgate handle is pulled while the power liftgate is opening the liftgate motor will disengage to allow manual operation If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions within the same cycle the system will automatically stop and the liftgate must be opened or closed manually If your liftgate is power closing and you put the vehicle in gear the liftgate will continue to power close How ever vehicle movement may result in a detection of an obstruction WARNING Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your passengers could be i
442. that corresponds to the following chart MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 547 Cavity Car Micro Description tridge Fuse Fuse F05 40 Amp Compressor for Green Air Suspension if equipped F06 40 Amp Antilock Brakes Green Electronic Stability Control Pump F07 40 Amp Starter Solenoid 072874390 a We Green Power Distribution Center F08 40 Amp Emission sensors Cavity Car Micro Description Green Diesel engine only tridge Fuse F09 40 Amp Diesel Fuel Heater Fuse Green Diesel engine only F03 60 Amp Rad Fan F10 40 Amp Body Controller Yellow Green Exterior Lighting 2 548 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Car Micro Description Cavity Car Micro Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse F11 30 Amp Trailer Tow Electric F23 30 Amp Body Controller 1 Pink Brake If Equipped Pink F12 40 Amp Body Controller 3 F24 30 Amp Driver Door Green Interior Lights Pink Module F13 40 Amp Blower Motor Front F25 30 Amp Front Wipers Green Pink F14 40 Amp Body Controller 4 F26 30 Amp Antilock Brakes Green Power Locks Pink Stability Control F17 30 Amp Headrest Release Module Valves Pink If Equipped F28 20 Amp Trailer Tow F20 30 Amp Passenger Door Yellow Backup Lights Pink Module If Equipped F22 20 Amp Engine Control Yellow Module ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 549
443. that the engine be running for all changes When lowering the vehicle all of the doors including the liftgate must be closed If a door is opened at any time while the vehicle is lowering the change will not be completed until the open door s is closed The Quadra Lift air suspension system uses a lifting and lowering pattern which keeps the headlights from incorrectly shining into oncoming traffic When raising the vehicle the rear of the vehicle will move up first and then the front When lowering the vehicle the front will move down first and then the rear After the engine is turned off it may be noticed that the air suspension system operates briefly this is normal The system is correcting the position of the vehicle to ensure a proper appearance To assist with changing a spare tire the Quadra Lift air suspension system has a feature which allows the auto matic leveling to be disabled Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information NOTE If equipped with a touch screen radio all enabling disabling of air suspension features must be done through the radio Refer to Uconnect Access Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information WARNING The air suspension system uses a high pressure volume of air to operate the system To avoid per sonal injury or damage to the system see your authorized de
444. the following components e Receiver Module Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors 436 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC and a graphic displaying tire pressures Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light The Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold tire placard pressure The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period Refer to Tires General Informa tion in Starting and Operating for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning threshold for any reason including low temperature effects or natural pressure loss through the tire The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long
445. the brake of the appro priate wheel s to counteract the sway of the trailer TSC will become active automatically once an excessively swaying trailer is recognized No driver action is re quired Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the trailer tongue weight recommendations Refer to Trailer Towing in Starting and Operating for further information When TSC is functioning the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light will flash the engine power may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being applied to individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from swaying TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in the Partial Off mode 404 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING If TSC activates while driving slow the vehicle down stop at the nearest safe location and adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer sway Hill Start Assist HSA The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the brake pedal If the driver does not apply the throttle during this short period of time the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill The system will release brake pressure in proportion to the amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to
446. the center console to convert DC current to AC current This outlet can power cellular phones electron ics and other low power devices requiring power up to 150 Watts Certain high end video games such as Play station3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit as will most power tools Power Inverter The power inverter is designed with built in overload protection If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded the power inverter will automatically shut down Once the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the 266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE inverter should automatically reset To avoid overloading CUPHOLDERS the circuit check the power ratings on electrical devices prior to using the inverter There are two cupholders for the front seat passengers located in the center console WARNING To avoid serious injury or death Do not insert any objects into the receptacles e Do not touch with wet hands e Close the lid when not in use e If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure Front Cupholders UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267 There are two cupholders for the rear seat passengers STORAGE located in the fold down center armrest Glove Compartment The glove compartment is located on the right side of the instrument panel 035133143 c Rear Cupholders 035209521 Glove Compartment 268 UNDERSTAND
447. the first 500 miles 805 km that a trailer is towed do not drive over 50 mph 80 km h and do not make starts at full throttle This helps the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads Perform the maintenance listed in the Maintenance Schedule Refer to Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals When towing a trailer never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings 464 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Improper towing can lead to a collision Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and will not shift during travel When trailering cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have a collision When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not overload your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or dam age to brakes axle engine transmission steering suspension chassis structure or tires Continued WARNING Continued e Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners e Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade When parking apply the parking brake on th
448. the syst MAG S Qs M Area Tapar ihe object s distance and location relative to the vehicle status when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the vehicle is in DRIVE and an obstacle has been detected If an object is detected in the left and or right rear region the display will show a single arc in the left and or right rear region and the system will produce a tone As the vehicle moves closer to the object the display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone T P will change from a single 1 2 second tone to slow to fast R to continuous N D S Park Assist ooo ooo 032774503 Park Assist Ready UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231 Single 1 2 Second Tone Slow Tone 232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Fast Tone 0329001176 g S 0329001175 Continuous Tone The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the EVIC display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233 WARNING ALERTS Reduced Rear Distance Greater than 79 39 in 39 25 in 25 12 in Less than 12 in in cm 79 in 200 cm 200 100 cm 100 65 cm 65 30 cm 30 cm Front Distance Greater than 47 39 in 39 25 in 25 12 in Less than 12 in in cm 47 in 120 cm 120 100 cm 100 65 cm 65 30 cm 30 cm Audible Alert None S
449. tic seat backing gt 022633126 c 022633125 Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether Attached Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether 2 Pull down on the tether to unhook it from the plastic seat backing 98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M To Install A LATCH compatible Child Restraint 4 Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat 1 If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto ine positon matic Locking Retractor ALR seat belt stow the seat BP belt following the instructions below See the section 5 If the child restraint has a tether strap connect it to the Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat top tether anchorage See the section Installing Child Belt to check what type of seat belt each seating Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage for direc position has tions to attach a tether anchor 2 Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the 6 Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint tether strap of the child seat so that you can more rearward and downward into the seat Remove slack easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle in the straps according to the child restraint manufac anchorages turer s instructions 3 Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for 7 Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by that seating position For some second row seats
450. ting e Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled fastened e How far if at all the driver was depressing the accelerator and or brake pedal and How fast the vehicle was traveling These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur NOTE EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non trivial crash situation occurs no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per sonal data e g name gender age and crash location are recorded However other parties such as law en forcement could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation To read data recorded by an EDR special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed In addition to the vehicle manufacturer other parties such as law enforcement that have the special equip ment can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR Child Restraints Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times including babies and children Every state in the United States and every Canadian province requires that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it 84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled up in a rea
451. to the transfer case e The transmission must be in PARK for recreational towing Before recreational towing perform the procedure outlined under Shifting into NEUTRAL N to be certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL N Otherwise internal damage will result e Failure to follow these procedures can cause severe transmission and or transfer case damage Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Continued Do not use a bumper mounted clamp on tow bar on your vehicle The bumper face bar will be damaged Shifting Into NEUTRAL N WARNING You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL N position without first fully engaging the parking brake The transfer case NEUTRAL N position disengages both the front and rear drive shafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move even if the transmission is in PARK The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle 474 STARTING AND OPERATING BENE Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for 4 If vehicle is equipped with Quadra Lift air suspen recreational towing CAUTION It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL N before recreational towing to prevent damage to internal parts 1 Bring the vehicle to a complete stop wit
452. to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es If you will be carrying children too small for adult sized seat belts the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems For more information on LATCH refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH NOTE The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator design This allows the air bag to have different rates of inflation based on several factors including the severity and type of collision Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag 1 Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat WARNING Infants in rear facing child restraints should never ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger Advanced Front Air Bag An air bag deployment can cause severe injury or death to infants in that position Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly see section on Child Restraints should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow children to s
453. trol of the vehicle Paddle Shift allows you to maximize engine braking eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts and improve overall vehicle performance This system can also provide you with more control during passing city driving cold slippery conditions mountain driving trailer towing and many other situations Operation When the transmission is in DRIVE or SPORT mode it will operate automatically shifting between the eight available gears To engage Paddle Shift mode simply tap one of the steering wheel mounted shift paddles while in DRIVE or SPORT mode Tapping to enter Paddle Shift mode will downshift the transmission to the next lower gear while using to enter Paddle Shift mode will retain the current gear When Paddle Shift mode is active the current transmission gear is displayed in the instrument cluster 368 STARTING AND OPERATING BENE In Paddle Shift mode the transmission will shift up or down when is manually selected by the driver unless an engine lugging or overspeed condition would result It will remain in the selected gear until another upshift or downshift is chosen except as described below The transmission will automatically downshift as the vehicle slows to a stop to prevent engine lugging and will display the current gear The transmission will automatically downshift to first gear when coming to a stop After a stop the driver should manually upshift the tra
454. truc tions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After reviewing the owner information it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain with the vehicle when sold When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has factory trained tech nicians and genuine MOPAR parts and cares about your satisfaction ROLLOVER WARNING Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate rem than other types of vehicles This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many passenger cars It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off road applications Driven in an unsafe manner all vehicles can go out of control Because of the higher center of gravity if this vehicle is out of control it may roll over when some other vehicles may not Do not attempt sharp turns abrupt maneuvers or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in a collision rollover of the vehicle and severe or fatal injury Drive carefully 6 INTRODUCTION Ay WARNING HIGHER ROLLOVER RISK 80bfe0t0 Rollover Warning Label Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts pro vided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury In fact the U S government notes that the universal use of existing seat belts cou
455. tween the front to rear driveshafts Driving in 4WD LOW on pavement will cause driveline binding and crow hop use only on wet or slippery surfaces 388 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Driving Through Water Although your vehicle is capable of driving through water there are a number of precautions that must be considered before entering the water NOTE Your vehicle is capable of water fording in up to 20 inches 51 cm of water while crossing small rivers or streams To maintain optimal performance of your vehi cle s heating and ventilation system it is recommended to switch the system into recirculation mode during water fording CAUTION When driving through water do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h Always check water depth before entering as a precaution and check all fluids afterward Driv ing through water may cause damage that may not be covered by the new vehicle limited warranty Driving through water more than a few inches centi meters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle If you must drive through water try to determine the depth and the bottom condition and location of any obstacles prior to enter ing Proceed with caution and maintain a steady con trolled speed less than 5 mph 8 km h in deep water to minimize wave effects Flowing Water If the water is swift flowing and rising as in storm run off avoid crossing until the water level recedes and or the
456. ual Park Release Cover 500 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 2 Using a screwdriver or similar tool push the metal 3 While the metal latch is the open position simultane latch in towards the tether strap ously pull upwards on the tether strap until it clicks and releases out of the park position 0605001179 0605001180 Release Latch Released Position NOTE To prevent the vehicle from rolling unintention ally firmly apply the parking brake EE WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 501 2 Once the tension has been released and the lever has 1 To disengage the Manual Park Release apply tension heet ua ocked be Sune this Stewed properly and locks upward while pushing the release latch towards the aai saaa tether to unlock the lever To Disengage the Manual Park Release Lever Stowed Position Release Latch NOTE Be sure to replace the cover by snapping it back in place 502 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial wrecker service If the trans mission and drivetrain are operable disabled vehicles may also be towed as described under Recreational Towing in the Starting and Operating section NOTE Vehicles equipped with Quadra Lift must be lowered to the Park lowest level and have automatic leveling disabled before tying them down from the body on a trailer or flatbed truck Refer to the section on Quadra
457. ude an Electronic Limited Slip Differential ELSD rear axle and the Quadra Trac II transfer case The optional ELSD axle is fully automatic and requires no driver input to operate Under normal driving conditions the unit func tions as a standard axle balancing torque evenly between left and right wheels With a traction difference between left and right wheels the coupling will sense a speed difference As one wheel begins to spin faster than the other torque will automatically transfer from the wheel that has less traction to the wheel that has traction While the transfer case and axle coupling differ in design their operation is similar Follow the Quadra Trac II transfer case shifting information preceding this section for shifting this system 376 STARTING AND OPERATING ME SELEC TERRAIN IF EQUIPPED Description Selec Terrain combines the capabilities of the vehicle control systems along with driver input to provide the best performance for all terrains Selec Terrain Switch 0582003301 Selec Terrain consists of the following positions Snow Tuning set for additional stability in inclement weather Use on and off road on loose traction surfaces such as snow When in Snow mode depending on certain operating conditions the transmission may use second gear rather than first gear during launches to minimize wheel slippage If equipped with air suspension the level will change to Normal
458. ulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start the engine Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 sec onds it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer CAUTION The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compat ible with some after market remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 Replacement Keys NOTE Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle CAUTION Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended e For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go always remember to place the ignition in the OFF position At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit Personal I
459. unbuckled 192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE To Activate To turn the system OFF push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control ACC ON OFF button again At this time the system will turn off and the EVIC will display Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Off Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control ACC ON OFF button The ACC menu in the EVIC displays ACC Ready Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Ready ACC Off 0323001263 0323001278 Adaptive Cruise Control Ready Adaptive Cruise Control OF EN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193 WARNING Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control ACC system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have a collision Always leave the system off when you are not using it To Set A Desired ACC Speed When the vehicle reaches the speed desired push the SET button or the SET button and release The EVIC will display the set speed If the system is Set when the vehicle speed is below 20 mph 32 km h the Set Speed shall be defaulted to 20 mph 32 km h If the system is Set when the vehicle speed is above 20 mph 32 km h the Set Speed shall be the current speed of the vehicle NOTE ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle in front of your vehicle in close proximity Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal If you do not the vehicle may continue
460. up The blower will increase in speed and transition into Auto mode Manual Operation The system allows for manual selection of blower speed air distribution mode A C status and recirculation con trol The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by adjusting the blower control The fan will now operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected This allows the front occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode The operator can also select the direction of the airflow by selecting one of the available mode settings A C operation and Recirculation control can also be manually selected in Manual operation E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341 Operating Tips NOTE Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather conditions Summer Operation The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating A solution of 50 OAT Organic Additive Technology coolant that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 12106 and 5096 water is recommended Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for proper coolant selection Winter Operation Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging V
461. ure is greater than 32 F 0 C ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179 Transmission In NEUTRAL Position When the ignition is ON and the transmission is in the NEU TRAL position the Rain Sensing system will not operate until the wiper switch is moved vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h or the shift lever is moved out of the NEUTRAL position Remote Start Mode Inhibit On vehicles equipped with Remote Starting system Rain Sensing wipers are not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start mode Once the operator is in the vehicle and has placed the ignition switch in the RUN position rain sensing wiper operation can resume if it has been selected and no other inhibit conditions mentioned previously exist TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column The tilt telescoping lever is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column Tilt Telescoping Lever 180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se To unlock the steering column push the lever downward toward the floor To tilt the steering column move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired To lengthen or shorten the steering column pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired To lock the steering column in position push the lever upward until fully engaged
462. vehicle Under these condi tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers NOTE Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steer ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system This noise should be considered normal and it does not in any way damage the steering system WARNING Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be obtained as soon as possible 3904 STARTING AND OPERATING ME CAUTION Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho rized dealer CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering system as the chemicals can damage your power
463. ver exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into PARK turn the engine OFF and remove the key fob When the ignition is in the OFF position the shift lever is locked in PARK securing the vehicle against un wanted movement e When leaving the vehicle always remove the key fob and lock your vehicle Continued WARNING Continued e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN position A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle 364 STARTING AND OPERATING ME CAUTION DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range as this can damage the drivetrain Before moving the shift lever out of PARK you must start the engine and also press the brake pedal Otherwise damage to the shift lever could result The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the transmission into the PARK position
464. ways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand 2 Insert the tip of the emergency key or a 2 flat blade screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves of the RKE transmitter apart Make sure not to damage the seal during removal 021337430 Separating RKE Transmitter Case 3 Remove the battery by turning the back cover over battery facing downward and tapping it lightly on a solid surface such as a table or similar then replace the battery When replacing the battery match the sign on the battery to the sign on the inside of the battery clip located on the back cover Avoid touching the 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es new battery with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 4 To assemble the RKE transmitter case snap the two halves together General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions This device may not cause harmful interference This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two c
465. wheel This label contains the driving limitations for this spare This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire replace or repair the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity ee STARTING AND OPERATING 429 WARNING Limited use spares are for emergency use only In stallation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling With this tire do not drive more than the speed listed on the limit use spare wheel Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side B Pillar or the rear edge of the driver s side door Replace or repair the original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not spin your vehicle s wheels above 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop ping when you are stuck Refer to Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could
466. wner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Authorized dealer name e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Vehicle delivery date and mileage Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 877 426 5337 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 English 800 387 9983 French E F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 579 In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico City 5081 7568 Outside Mexico City 1 800 505 1300 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its customer center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada For TTY teletypewriter users dial 711 and for Voice callers dial 1 800 855 0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufa
467. y Program ESP Indicator 410 EXOT 5 coss os oe des ue does deos du MS 113 PUE vus vua acie Ars APA DR ACER Qa ECT A AUN 286 Hazard Warning Flasher 480 Headlights 2 6 eee 557 Headlights On With Wipers 165 High Beam Indicator 006 286 Illuminated Entry 0 00000000 23 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 286 Map Reading 0 0 0 eee eee 171 Passing 6 sce do sha eal Ro e eee qoe 174 Reading ames ee x amb aS eon e 171 Rear Servicing idus sensere kee eae 559 504 INDEX ae Rear Lail 244r Re e e x See EET 559 Seat Belt Reminder 0000 285 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 293 SEVICE vs ax UE ah oe RE E SERRE Ed 557 Service Engine Soon Malfunction Indicator 286 Side Market 4 dm aede an e ORAE deg un 559 SmartBeams eito miere eia niies 166 Tire Pressure Monitoring TPMS 290 Traction Control es osse some ERR RU 410 Turn Signalez see aa ues cede pes es 113 Vanity Mirror 6 ee 128 Loading Vehicle ois ore be bode rarer 453 TAPES cie sone ate ante UR Tre ue a POUR Aer d 417 LOCKS 43 45 20462403 REG RERO Pg See e deg 32 Child Protection cbe heb RR 34 DOOP 2324 heated i Se RR LES SESS ES 32 Pover DO0OPE e ranea t ease Be ee e aa ara 34 Lubrication Body s sss ck Rer nex 523 Maintenance Free Battery 000 519 Maintenance Procedures 00000 eee 514
468. y using the RKE transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the vehicle s interior door panel Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 WINDOWS Power Windows The power window controls are located on the driver s door trim panel There is a single switch on the front passenger door and rear doors which operate the front passenger and rear passenger door windows The win dow controls will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON RUN or ACC position Power Window Switches The power window switches remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned OFF Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Never leave children unattended in a vehicle and do not let children play with power windows Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle and do not leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode Occupants particu larly unattended children can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death Auto Down Both the driver and front passenger window switches have an Auto Down feature Press the window switch past the first detent release and the window will go down automatically To cancel the Auto Down move ment operate the switch in
469. your passengers safe too Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Continued 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and adjust the seat 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt go around your lap Latch Plate 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 WARNING e A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you A belt that is too loose will not protect you prop erly In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your stron gest bones will take the force in a collision Continued 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEF
470. ys in the EVIC ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197 AI 0323001262 0323001261 Distance Setting 4 Bars Longest Distance Setting 3 Bars Long 198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M JON JEN 0323001260 0323001259 Distance Setting 2 Bars Medium Distance Setting 1 Bar Short ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199 To increase the distance setting press the Distance Set ting Increase button and release Each time the button is pressed the distance setting increases by one bar longer To decrease the distance setting press the Distance Setting Decrease button and release Each time the button is pressed the distance setting decreases by one bar shorter If there is no vehicle ahead the vehicle will maintain the set speed If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the same lane the EVIC displays the Sensed Vehicle Indi cator icon and the system adjusts vehicle speed auto matically to maintain the distance setting regardless of the set speed The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set speed The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of the sensor The vehicle ahead slows to a complete stop 0 mph 0 km h for more than 2 seconds and the system automatically disengages itself The distance setting is changed The system disengages Refer to the information on ACC Activatio
471. ystem operating properly it is impor tant to note the following maintenance items e Always keep the sensor clean Carefully wipe the sensor lens with a soft cloth Be cautious not to damage the sensor lens Do not remove any screws from the sensor Doing so could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and require a sensor realignment If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due to a collision see your authorized dealer for service Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor including transparent material or aftermarket grilles Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or malfunction When the condition that deactivated the system is no longer present the system will return to the Adaptive Cruise Control Off state and will resume function by simply reactivating it NOTE If the ACC FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor message occurs frequently e g more than once on every trip without any snow rain mud or other obstruction have the radar sensor realigned at your authorized dealer Installing a snow plow front end protector an after market grille or modifying the grille is not recom mended Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit ACC FCW operation 204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Clean Front Windshield Warning The ACC FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield warning will display and also a chime will indicate when cond

2014 Jeep Grand Cherokee Owner`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents